K0376 Vista 128fbp V1 Installation Manual

Vista-128FBP v1 Installation Manual Vista-128FBP v1 Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library

User Manual: vista-128fbp-v1-installation-manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 144 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

K0376 8/02 edited by Tech Support



$







)

3



$







)

3



&RPPHUFLDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\

3DUWLWLRQHG6HFXULW\6\VWHP

ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ



,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH

ON OFF

OFF

MAX

INSTANT

READY

AWAY

TEST

CODE

STAY

BYPASS

CHIME

ARMED

READY

OFF

MAX

INSTANT

READY

AWAY

TEST

CODE

STAY

BYPASS

CHIME

ARMED

READY

iii

Table of Contents

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

List of Figures...................................................................................................................................vi

Conventions Used in This Manual.............................................................................................. vii

SECTION 1: General Description ...............................................................................................1-1

About the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP ...................................................................................................1-1

Features...........................................................................................................................................................1-1

SECTION 2: Partitioning and Panel Linking...........................................................................2-1

Theory of Partitioning.....................................................................................................................................2-1

Setting-Up a Partitioned System ...................................................................................................................2-1

Common Lobby Logic......................................................................................................................................2-1

Master Keypad Setup and Operation ............................................................................................................2-3

Panel Linking ..................................................................................................................................................2-4

How to Use Panel Linking..............................................................................................................................2-5

SECTION 3: Installing The Control............................................................................................3-1

Mounting the Control Cabinet .......................................................................................................................3-1

Installing the Cabinet Lock............................................................................................................................3-1

Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Guidelines.........................................................................................3-1

Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Guidelines...............................................................................3-2

Installing the Control's Circuit Board ...........................................................................................................3-2

Installing the Keypads....................................................................................................................................3-3

Installing External Sounders .........................................................................................................................3-4

Auxiliary Relay Connections ..........................................................................................................................3-5

Telephone Line Connections...........................................................................................................................3-7

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8..........................................................................................3-8

Installing RPM Devices ................................................................................................................................3-12

Wireless Zone Expansion..............................................................................................................................3-14

Installing Output Devices.............................................................................................................................3-17

Installing a Remote Keyswitch.....................................................................................................................3-19

Installing a 5140LED Indicator Module......................................................................................................3-19

Installing a Remote Keypad Sounder..........................................................................................................3-20

Installing the VA8200 Panel Link Module..................................................................................................3-20

Long Range Radio Connected to the ECP....................................................................................................3-21

Long Range Radio Connected to the J2 Triggers........................................................................................3-23

Installing the Alpha Pager Module..............................................................................................................3-23

Access Control Using VistaKey....................................................................................................................3-25

Access Control Using the PassPoint Access Control System .....................................................................3-26

Event Log Connections .................................................................................................................................3-27

Installing the 4285/4286 VIP Module..........................................................................................................3-27

Installing the Audio Alarm Verification Module.........................................................................................3-27

Connecting the Transformer ........................................................................................................................3-30

Earth Ground Connections...........................................................................................................................3-31

Determining the Control’s Power Supply Load...........................................................................................3-31

Determining the Size of the Standby Battery.............................................................................................3-33

Table of Contents

SECTION 4: Programming...........................................................................................................4-1

Program Modes................................................................................................................................................4-1

Entering and Exiting Programming Mode....................................................................................................4-1

Data Field Programming Mode......................................................................................................................4-1

#93 Menu Mode Programming.......................................................................................................................4-2

Zone Number Designations ............................................................................................................................4-4

Zone Response Type Definitions.....................................................................................................................4-6

Zone Input Type Definitions...........................................................................................................................4-7

Programming for Panel Linking.....................................................................................................................4-8

Programming for the Alpha Pager Module....................................................................................................4-8

Programming for Access Control....................................................................................................................4-9

Programming for ECP Long Range Radio...................................................................................................4-10

Programming for the Event Log...................................................................................................................4-10

SECTION 5: Data Field Descriptions.........................................................................................5-1

About Data Field Programming.....................................................................................................................5-1

Programming Data Fields ..............................................................................................................................5-1

SECTION 6: Scheduling Options.................................................................................................6-1

Time Window Definitions ...............................................................................................................................6-2

Open/Close Schedules Definitions..................................................................................................................6-3

Scheduling Menu Mode...................................................................................................................................6-4

Time Windows .................................................................................................................................................6-5

Daily Open/Close Schedules...........................................................................................................................6-5

Holiday Schedules...........................................................................................................................................6-6

Time-Driven Events........................................................................................................................................6-7

Limitation of Access Schedules ....................................................................................................................6-11

Temporary Schedules....................................................................................................................................6-12

User Scheduling Menu Mode........................................................................................................................6-13

SECTION 7: Downloading Primer..............................................................................................7-1

General Information........................................................................................................................................7-1

Unattended Download ....................................................................................................................................7-1

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel...........................................................................................................7-2

Scheduled Download.......................................................................................................................................7-3

Direct-Wire Downloading ...............................................................................................................................7-4

Telco Handoff...................................................................................................................................................7-4

SECTION 8: Setting the Real-Time Clock.................................................................................8-1

General Information........................................................................................................................................8-1

Setting the Time and Date .............................................................................................................................8-1

SECTION 9: User Access Codes...................................................................................................9-1

General Information........................................................................................................................................9-1

User Codes & Levels of Authority..................................................................................................................9-1

Multiple Partition Access................................................................................................................................9-2

Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code..............................................................................................9-3

Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code..........................................................................................9-4

Adding an RF Key to an Existing User..........................................................................................................9-4

Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code............................................................................................9-5

Exiting the User Edit Mode............................................................................................................................9-5

Table of Contents

SECTION 10: Testing the System..............................................................................................10-1

Battery Test...................................................................................................................................................10-1

Dialer Test .....................................................................................................................................................10-1

Fire Drill Test (Code + [#] + 69) ...................................................................................................................10-1

One-Man Fire Walk-Test (Code + [#] + 68) .................................................................................................10-1

Burglary Walk-Test (Code + [5] TEST)........................................................................................................10-2

Armed Burglary System Test.......................................................................................................................10-1

Testing Wireless Transmitters.....................................................................................................................10-1

Trouble Conditions........................................................................................................................................10-4

To the Installer..............................................................................................................................................10-5

APPENDIX A: Regulatory Agency Statements ....................................................................... A-1

UL Installation Requirements.......................................................................................................................A-1

UL864/NFPA Local Fire ................................................................................................................................A-1

UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire.............................................................................A-1

UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault .............................................A-1

UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm.........................................................................................A-2

UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm ........................................................................................A-2

California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) Requirements. ...............................................................................A-2

APPENDIX B: Summary of System Commands...................................................................... B-1

APPENDIX C: Specifications......................................................................................................C-1

APPENDIX D: Contact ID and Pager Event Codes................................................................D-1

TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES.................................................................................................D-1

Event Log and Pager Alpha Descriptors.......................................................................................................D-2

Index........................................................................................................................................ Index-1

THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM

ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY

List of Figures

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Figure 3-1: Installing the Lock...............................................................................................................................................3-1

Figure 3-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations ........................................................................................................3-2

Figure 3-3: Mounting the PC Board.......................................................................................................................................3-2

Figure 3-4: Keypad Connections to Control Panel................................................................................................................3-3

Figure 3-5: Using A Supplementary Power Supply ..............................................................................................................3-3

Figure 3-6: External Sounder Connections............................................................................................................................3-5

Figure 3-7: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Alarm Activation.....................................................................................................3-6

Figure 3-8: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Smoke Detector Reset.............................................................................................3-6

Figure 3-9: 2-Wire Smoke Detector on Zone 1 (for zone 2 use terminals 17 & 18)..............................................................3-8

Figure 3-10: 4-Wire Smoke Detectors....................................................................................................................................3-9

Figure 3-11: Wiring a 333PRM to the Control ....................................................................................................................3-10

Figure 3-12: Wiring a 333PRM using a Power Supply........................................................................................................3-10

Figure 3-13: Wiring Latching Glassbreaks to Zone 8...........................................................................................................3-11

Figure 3-14: Wiring a Normally Closed Sensor Loop for Tamper Supervision..................................................................3-11

Figure 3-15: Wiring a Normally Open Sensor Loop for Tamper Supervision....................................................................3-11

Figure 3-16: Polling Loop Connections to the Control Panel..............................................................................................3-13

Figure 3-17: Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module.......................................................................3-13

Figure 3-18: Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules.......................................................................3-14

Figure 3-19: Installing the 5881ENHC with Tamper Protection........................................................................................3-15

Figure 3-20: 5881 RF Receiver (cover removed)..................................................................................................................3-15

Figure 3-21: 4204 Relay Module...........................................................................................................................................3-18

Figure 3-22: 4204CF Relay Module......................................................................................................................................3-18

Figure 3-23: Wiring the FSA Module...................................................................................................................................3-18

Figure 3-24: Remote Keyswitch Wiring...............................................................................................................................3-19

Figure 3-25: Wiring the 5140LED Indicator Module..........................................................................................................3-20

Figure 3-26: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring.....................................................................................................................3-20

Figure 3-27: Panel Linking Block Diagram.........................................................................................................................3-20

Figure 3-29: Wiring Long Range Radio to Keypad Terminals............................................................................................3-22

Figure 3-30: Wiring the Alpha Pager Module......................................................................................................................3-24

Figure 3-31: Wiring the VistaKey.........................................................................................................................................3-26

Figure 3-32: Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module...............................................................................................................3-26

Figure 3-33: Printer Connections to the 4100SM................................................................................................................3-27

Figure 3-34: 4285/4286 VIP Module Connections...............................................................................................................3-27

Figure 3-35: AAV Connections.............................................................................................................................................3-30

Figure 3-36: Connecting the Backup Batteries....................................................................................................................3-34

Figure 7-1: Direct-Wire Downloading Connections...............................................................................................................7-4

VISTA-128FBP Summary of Connections Diagram.................................................................................. Second to Last Page

VISTA-250FBP Summary of Connections Diagram......................................................................................Inside Back Cover

vii

Conventions Used in This Manual

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Before you begin using this manual, it is important that you understand the meaning of the following

symbols (icons).

ULThese notes include specific information that must be followed if you are installing this system for

a UL Listed application.

These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with the

installation, and that, if not observed, could result in operational difficulties.

This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the system, or

could cause damage to the system. Please read each warning carefully. This symbol also

denotes warnings about physical harm to the user

ZONE PROG?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Many system options are programmed in an interactive mode by responding to

alpha keypad display prompts. These prompts are shown in a single-line box.

✴00 Additional system options are programmed via data fields, which are indicated by a “star” (T)

followed by the data field number.

PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS:

Unless noted otherwise, references to specific model numbers represent ADEMCO products.

viii

1-1

SECTION 1

General Description

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

About the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP is an 8-partition, UL Listed commercial fire and burglary control panel with the

following features:

• Up to 128 zones for VISTA-128FBP; 250 zones for VISTA-250FBP (hardwired, polling loop, and wireless zones)

• Up to 150 user codes for VISTA-128FBP; 250 user codes for VISTA-250FBP

• Supervision of Notification Appliance Circuits, phone lines, keypads, RF receivers, and output devices

• Scheduling capabilities (allows certain operations to be automated)

• The capability to link up to 8 control panels using Panel Linking Modules

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP can interface with the following devices:

• Symphony (AUI)

• An alpha numeric paging device (VA8201)

• Panel Link Module (VA8200)

• An ECP Long Range Radio that can send Contact ID messages

• An access control system by using either the ADEMCO PassPoint system (via the VISTA Gateway Module) or a

VistaKey module (via the polling loop)

ULThe access control function is not Listed for use with the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Control Panel in a UL

installation.

The system supports either the VistaKey or the VISTA Gateway Module, not both.

NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,

and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250FBP’s features. The following table lists the differences

between the VISTA-128FBP and the VISTA-250FBP control panels. All other features are identical.

Feature VISTA-128FBP VISTA-250FBP

Number of Zones 128 250

Number of User Codes 150 250

Number of Access Cards 250 500

Event Log Capacity 512 1000

VistaKey Modules 8 15

Features

Hardwire and Optional Expansion Zones

• Provides 8 hardwire zones.

• Supports up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on zone 1 and zone 2 (32 total).

• Automatically resets 4-wire smoke detectors using the J2 output when a code + off is entered.

• Triggers the built-in sounders on other hardwired smoke detectors if one smoke detector annunciates an alarm. This

feature requires a 4204 Relay Module and/or the 333PRM.

• Provides tamper supervision on the hardwire zones.

• Supports up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8.

• Supports up to 242 additional expansion zones (120 for the VISTA-128FBP) using a built-in polling (multiplex) loop.

• Supports up to 250 wireless zones (128 for the VISTA-128FBP) fewer if using hardwire and/or polling loop zones.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

1-2

ULThe 5881ENHC RF Receiver and the 5869 Holdup Switch Transmitter are listed for UL Commercial Burglary

applications. All other RF receivers and transmitters are not listed for UL Commercial Burglary applications.

• Can program burglary zones as silent in the alarm condition (alarm output is silent and the keypad does not display

or sound the alarm).

• Provides three keypad panic keys: 1 + ✴ (A), ✴ + # (B), and 3 + # (C).

Peripherals Devices

• Supports up to 31 addressable devices, (keypads, RF receivers, relay modules, etc.).

• Supervises devices (keypads, RF receivers, and relay modules) and individual relays (up to 32), as well as system

zones (RF receivers and keypad panics).

• Provides 96 outputs using 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules, Fire System Annunciators (FSA-8, FSA-24), and V-Plex

Relay Modules can activate outputs in response to system events (alarm condition), at a specific time of day, at

random times, and manually using the #70 Relay Command Mode.

• Supports additional style-Y supervised Notification Appliance Circuits using a 4204CF.

• Supports the ADEMCO 4285/4286 VIP Module, which allows access to the system from either a remote location or

on the premises

ULThe 4285/4286 VIP Module is not Listed for use with the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Control Panel in a UL

installation.

• Supports the ADEMCO 4146 Keyswitch on any one of the system's 8 partitions.

• Supports the PS24 Power Supply Module, which supplies two 24VFW, 1.7A full-wave rectified, unfiltered outputs.

Arming/Disarming and Bypassing

• Can arm the system with zones faulted (Vent Zone). These zones are automatically bypassed and can be

programmed to automatically unbypass when the zone restores.

• Can arm with entry/exit and interior type zones faulted (Arm w/Fault). These zones must be restored before the exit

delay expires, otherwise an alarm is generated.

UL• Vent zones cannot be used in UL installations.

• You must disable the Force Arm option (used in conjunction with the Arm w/Fault option), in UL installations.

• Provides global arming capability (ability to arm all partitions the user code has access to in one command).

• Can Quick Exit an armed premises without having to disarm and then rearm the system.

• Can be armed in one of three STAY modes or Instant modes, automatically bypassing specific burglary zones

regardless of the zone response type.

• Can automatically bypass specific zones if no one exits the premises after arming (Auto-STAY). Auto-STAY will not

occur if the system is armed via an RF transmitter, VIP module, scheduling, access control, keyswitch, or

downloading.

• Can bypass a group of zones with one set of keystrokes.

• Supports Exit Error Logic, whereby the system can tell the difference between a regular alarm and an alarm caused

by leaving an entry/exit door open. If the system is not subsequently disarmed, faulted entry/exit zone(s) and/or

interior zones are bypassed and the system arms.

• Supports Recent Close report, which is designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred within 2

minutes after the exit delay has expired.

Partitioning and Panel Linking

• Can control 8 separate areas (partitions) independently, each functioning as if it had its own separate control. All

fire zones must be assigned to partition 1.

• Provides a Common Lobby partition, which can be programmed to arm automatically when the last partition is

armed, and to disarm when the first partition is disarmed.

• Provides a Master partition (9), used for the purpose of viewing the status of all partitions at the same time.

• Can display fire, burglary, panic, and trouble conditions at all other partitions’ keypads (selectable option).

• Can “link” together up to 8 control panels. This allows users to access and control from a keypad another control

panel.

Section 1 - General Description

1-3

Scheduling

• Can automate system functions, such as arming, disarming, and activation of outputs (e.g., lights).

• Provides access schedules (for limiting system access to users by time).

• Provides an End User Output Programming Mode, allowing the user to control outputs.

Access Control

• Supports up to 15 VistaKey modules (15 access points) (VISTA-128FBP supports 8 modules), which are used for

access control. It is a single-door access control module.

• Support up to 500 access cards (250 for the VISTA-128FBP).

• Supports ADEMCO PassPoint system via one VISTA Gateway Module (VGM), for a fully integrated access control

system.

• Can store access control events in the event log.

System Communication

• Provides supervision of the phone lines (main and backup)

• Supports the 5140DLM optional backup dialer for the second phone line.

• Supports ADEMCO Contact ID; ADEMCO High Speed; ADEMCO Express; and 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 ADEMCO and

Sescoa/Radionics Low-Speed formats.

The system is shipped defaulted for Contact ID communication. It is the only format capable of uniquely reporting all

250 zones, as well as openings and closings for all 250 users. This requires central stations to be equipped with the

ADEMCO 685 receiver using software level 4.10 or higher to fully support all new VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP

report codes. If you need to update your 685 receiver, contact your distributor.

• Can send messages such as alarms, opens/closes, etc. to up to 8 paging services.

• Provides two paging formats (alphanumeric – requires the VA8201 Alpha Pager Module; and numeric – sent directly

by the control)

• Supports Dynamic Signaling feature, which prevents redundant signals being sent to the central station when both

the built-in dialer and Long Range Radio are used.

• Provides an Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) option that permits voice dialog between an operator at the central

station and a person at the premises. An AAV unit, such as Eagle model 1250, is required.

ULThe Eagle Model 1250 AAV unit is not UL Listed.

Downloading

• Supports upload and download capability.

• Can perform unattended downloading (no one at the downloading computer).

• Provides an Installer Unattended Program Mode. This allows the installer to program the download phone number,

subscriber number, and primary central station receiver phone number without entering the normal program mode.

• Can periodically and automatically perform a scheduled download.

ULUnattended and Scheduled Downloading are not UL Listed features.

• Can download access control cardholder information.

Event Log

• Provides an event log (history log) that can store up to 1000 events (512 for the VISTA-128FBP).

• Can print the event log on a serial printer or parallel printer using the VA8201 Alpha Pager Module.

• Can view the event log on an alpha keypad or AUI.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

1-4

Fire Walk-Test Mode

• Provides an automatic test of integrated V-Plex devices that have the automatic test feature.

• Can display all fire zones that remain untested.

• Can log test results in the event log.

• Can report the test results to the central station.

Additional Features

• Provides two style-Y supervised Notification Appliance Circuits.

• Provides an auxiliary relay (form C) that can activate alarms troubles/supervisories, reset 4-wire smoke detectors, or

as a battery saver (removes power form non-critical loads 4 hours after AC power loss).

• Provides up to 60 installer-defined, custom words that can be used for zone descriptors.

• Provides 35 keypad macro commands (each macro is a series of keypad commands of up to 32 keystrokes) using the

A, B, C, and D keys by partition.

• Provides cross-zone capability, which helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going into alarm unless

its cross-zone is also faulted within a 5-minute period.

• Contains a built-in User’s Manual, which provides the end user with a brief explanation of the function of a key

when the user presses any of the function keys on the keypad for 5 seconds.

• Provides trigger outputs, which may interface with Long Range Radio equipment or other devices such as keyswitch

LEDs, or printer.

• Provides an option to have trouble and supervisory conditions to automatically clear from the display when the zone

returns to the ready/normal state (entry of Code + OFF is not required).

• Provides Maintenance Signal support for certain smoke detectors (5808, 4192CPM, 4192SDM, 4192SDTM, 5192).

At least one 2-line alpha keypad (6139/6160) must be connected to the system for programming (if you are using

keypad programming), and must remain connected to the system in order to allow the primary user to program

additional user codes into the system at a later time.

2-1

SECTION 2

Partitioning and Panel Linking

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Theory of Partitioning

This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 8 different areas, as if each had its own control. These areas

are called partitions. A Partitioned system allows the user to disarm certain areas while leaving other areas armed, or

to limit access to certain areas to specific individuals. Each system user can be assigned to operate any or all partitions,

and can be given a different authority level in each.

Before anything can be assigned to those partitions, you must first determine how many partitions (1-8) are required.

Following are some facts you need to know about partitioning.

Keypads

Each keypad must be given a unique "address" and be assigned to one partition. It can also be assigned to Partition 9 if

Master keypad operation is desired. (See “Master Keypad Setup and Operation” later in this section.)

Zones

Each zone must be assigned to one partition. The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition's

keypad(s).

All fire zones must be assigned to partition 1to ensure that all Fire Test modes operate correctly.

Users

Each user may be given access to one or more partitions. If a user is to operate more than one partition and would like

to arm/disarm all or some of those partitions with a single command, the user must be enabled for Global Arming for

those partitions (when entering user codes).

A user with access to more than one partition (multiple access) can "log on" to one partition from another partition's

keypad, provided that program field 2*18: Enable GOTO is enabled for each partition he/she wants to log on to from

another.

A partition can be selected as a "common lobby" partition, and other partitions can affect this partition by causing

arming/disarming of this partition to be automated (see “Common Lobby Logic” later in this section).

Setting-Up a Partitioned System

The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below. If you need more information on how to program

the options, see SECTION 4: Programming.

1. Determine how many partitions the system will consist of (programmed in field 2*00).

2. Assign keypads to partitions (Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).

3. Assign zones to partitions (Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).

4. Confirm zones are displayed at the keypad(s) assigned to those partitions.

5. Assign users to partitions.

6. Enable the GOTO feature (program field 2*18) for each partition a multiple-access user can log on to (alpha keypad

only).

7. Program partition-specific fields (see the SECTION 5: Data Field Descriptions).

Common Lobby Logic

When an installation consists of a partition shared by users of other partitions in a building, that shared partition may

be assigned as the "common lobby" partition for the system (program field 1*17). An example of this might be in a

medical building where there are two doctors’ offices and a common entrance area (see example that follows

explanation).

The Common Lobby feature employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common lobby. Two programming

fields determine the way the common lobby will react relative to the status of other partitions. They are: 1*18 Affects

Lobby and 1*19 Arms Lobby.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

2-2

1*18 Affects Lobby (must be programmed by partition)

Setting this field to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows:

a. When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby is automatically disarmed.

b. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed.

1*19 Arms Lobby (must be programmed by partition)

Setting this field to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows:

a. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed.

b. Arming a partition that is programmed to arm the lobby causes the system to automatically attempt to arm the

lobby. If any faults exist in the lobby partition, or if another partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby

cannot be armed, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" is displayed.

You cannot select a partition to "arm" the lobby unless it has first been selected to "affect" the lobby. Do not enable

field 1*19 without enabling field 1*18.

The following chart sums up how the common lobby partition will operate.

1*18

Affects Lobby

1*19

Arms Lobby

Disarms when

partition disarms? Attempts to arm

when partition

arms?

Can be armed if

other partitions

disarmed?

0 0 NO NO YES

1 0 YES NO NO

1 1 YES YES NO

0 1 ---ENTRY NOT ALLOWED---

Example

Here is an example of how the lobby would react in a typical setup.

OFFICE 1 OFFICE 2

MAIN ENTRANCE

COMMON LOBBY

V128BP-001-V0

User #1 has access to Office #1 and the Common Lobby.

User #2 has access to Office #2 and the Common Lobby.

Office #1 is set up to affect the Common Lobby, but not arm it.

Office #2 is set up to affect and arm the Common Lobby.

NOTE: In the tables below, the notations in parentheses ( )

indicate the current status of the other partition when the user

takes action.

Sequence #1:

Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action

User #1: Disarms (Armed) Disarms

User #2: (Disarmed) Disarms No Change

User #1: Arms (Disarmed) No change

User #2: (Armed) Arms Arms

Section 2 – Partitioning and Panel Linking

2-3

Sequence #2:

Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action

User #2: (Armed) Disarms Disarms

User #1: Disarms (Disarmed) (No change)

User #2: (Disarmed) Arms No Change

User #1: Arms (Armed) No Change

Notice that in sequence #1, because Office #2 was the last to arm, the lobby also armed (Office #2 is programmed to

affect and arm the lobby). In sequence #2, the lobby could not arm when Office #2 armed, because Office #1, which

affects the lobby, was still disarmed.

When Office #1 armed, the lobby still did not arm because Office #1 was not programmed to arm the lobby. User #1

would have to arm the lobby manually. Therefore, you would want to program a partition to affect and arm the lobby if

the users of that partition are expected to be the last to leave the building.

Do not assign partition 1 as the common lobby if fire zones are being used in the system. All fire zones must be

assigned to partition 1 to ensure all Fire Test modes operate correctly.

How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby

Codes with Global Arming

If a code is given "global arming" when it is defined (see the SECTION 9: User Access Codes), the keypad prompts the

user to select the partitions they want to arm. Only the partitions the user has access to are displayed. This allows the

user to choose the partitions to be armed or disarmed, and so eliminates the "automatic" operation of the lobby. Keep in

mind, however, that if a user attempts to arm all, and another "affecting" partition is disarmed, the user cannot arm the

lobby, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" is displayed.

Codes with Non-Global Arming

If a user arms with a non-global code, the lobby partition operation is automatic, as described by fields 1*18 and 1*19.

Other Methods of Arming/Disarming

Common Lobby logic remains active when arming or disarming a partition that affects and/or arms the common lobby in

one of the following manners:

• Quick-Arm

• Keyswitch

• Wireless Button

• Wireless Keypad

Arming/Disarming Remotely

If a user arms or disarms remotely (through Compass downloading software), the lobby does not automatically follow

another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby. The lobby must be armed separately, after arming all

affecting partitions first.

Auto-Arming/Disarming

If scheduling is used to automatically arm and/or disarm partitions, the common lobby partition does not automatically

follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby. The lobby partition must be scheduled to

arm/disarm and must be scheduled as the last partition to arm.

If you are using auto-arming, make sure that the Auto-Arm Delay and Auto-Arm Warning periods, for the lobby

partition, (fields 2*05 and 2*06) combined are longer than that of any other partition that affects the lobby. This

causes the lobby to arm last.

Master Keypad Setup and Operation

Although this system has eight actual partitions, it provides an extra partition strictly for the purpose of assigning

keypads as Master keypads for the system.

Assigning any keypad to Partition 9 in Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode makes that keypad a Master keypad.

A Master keypad reflects the status of the entire system (Partitions 1-8) on its display at one time. This is useful

because it eliminates the need for a building security officer to have to log on to various partitions from one partition's

keypad to find out where an alarm has occurred.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

2-4

The following is a typical display:

S Y S T E M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S T A T U S R R N N A ✴B

Possible status indications include:

A = Armed Away S = Armed Stay M = Armed Maximum C = Comm Fail

I = Armed Instant R = Ready N = Not Ready

B = Bypassed/Ready ✴ = Alarm T = Trouble

F = Fire Alarm P = AC Power Failure L = Low System Battery

To obtain more information regarding a particular partition, enter [✴] + Partition No. (e.g., [✴] + [4]). This allows

viewing only of that partition. In order to affect that partition, the user must use a code that has access to that

partition. Also, in order for a user of any partition to log on to Partition 9 to view the status of all partitions, that user

must have access to all partitions. Otherwise, access is denied.

The following is displayed for a fault condition on Zone 2 (Loading Dock Window) on Partition 1 (Warehouse) when a

user logs on from a keypad on Partition 9:

WHSE DISARMED

HIT ✴ FOR FAULTS

Pressing [✴] causes the following display to appear at Partition 1's keypad(s):

FAULT 002 LOADING

DOCK WINDOW

Additional zone faults are displayed one at a time. To display a new partition's status, press [✴] + Partition No.

The Armed LED on a Master keypad is lit only if all partitions have been armed successfully. The Ready LED is lit only

if all partitions are "ready to arm." Neither LED is lit if only some partitions are armed and/or only some partitions are

ready.

Press [✴] + [0] or [✴] + [9] to return to the master partition. Otherwise, if no keys are pressed for 2 minutes, the system

automatically returns to the master partition

The sounder on a Master keypad reflects the sound of the most critical condition on all of the partitions. The priority of

the sounds, from most to least critical, is as follows:

1. Pulsing fire alarm sounds

2. Steady burglar alarm sounds

3. Trouble sounds (rapid beeping)

Silence the sounder by pressing any key on the Master keypad or a keypad on the partition where the condition exists.

A Master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1. Master keypad panics are sent to Partition 1, and will activate

on Partition 1. Therefore, panics must be programmed for Partition 1.

Panel Linking

Up to eight VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP control panels may be networked, enabling a user to control the features of

all control panels from a single location. The panel linking bus supports an end-to-end network length of up to 4,000 feet,

making it ideal for multi-building environments (e.g., a shopping mall, college campus, etc.).

ULPanel Linking is not permitted in UL installations.

Panel linking requires a VA8200 Panel Link Module (PLM) on each VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP. Users can link

(access other control panels) in any of three different modes: Single-Partition, Single-Panel Mode, Multi-Partition, Multi-

Panel Mode, Multi-Panel View Mode. These modes are described later in this section.

Each PLM connects to the ECP bus on the control panel and communicates to each PLM via an RS-485 bus (3-wire

twisted cable run) with a maximum wire-run of 4000 feet end-to-end.

Section 2 – Partitioning and Panel Linking

2-5

• Users 001-050 are the only users that can perform panel linking and are automatically assigned panel

linking access when added to the system.

• An alpha keypad must be used for panel linking.

• The system may take up to 7 seconds to respond to a command when in a panel linking mode

NOTE: A user cannot access partitions or panels that they have not been assigned to.

Panel Link Module Supervision

The Panel Link Module can be supervised for its connection to the control panel. This module’s supervisory zone is 8xx,

where “xx” = the ECP address of the PLM. You must program that zone with response type 05 (Day/Night) in Zone

Programming in the #93 Menu Mode (refer to the Programming Guide for detailed programming instructions). If you

want to report the supervisory failure to the central station and/or to a paging service, the appropriate reporting

parameters for that zone must be programmed.

If you want the supervisory failure of other PLM(s) on other linked control panels to display on this control panel, they

must be programmed into Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode with response type 14 in this control panel (refer to

the Programming Guide for detailed programming instructions). The panel ID number for each module must match the

panel ID number programmed in Device Programming of its “host” VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP.

How to Use Panel Linking

Panel Linking can be used in any of three different modes:

• Single-Partition, Single-Panel − displays status of a partition on a remote control panel and allows control of that

remote control panel.

• Multi-Partition, Multi-Panel Mode − displays status and allows arming/disarming of multiple partitions at once on a

remote control panel.

• Multi-Panel View Mode − displays status and allows arming/disarming of multiple remote control panels at a time.

NOTE: A user will not be able to access or view partitions or panels that they have not been assigned to.

Single-Partition Single-Panel Mode

To access the Single-Partition, Single Panel mode, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter

User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [86].

2 Enter the panel ID number (01-08) of the panel you want to link to.

3 Enter the partition number of the panel. The keypad displays “AWAITING PANEL LINK.” After a few

seconds, the keypad displays the status of the partition along with the panel ID number and partition

number flashing in the upper right-hand corner. The user now has full control of the remote control panel.

All functions can be performed except the following:

• Those limited by the user’s authority level.

• The user cannot enter Installer Program mode

• The user cannot execute another panel linking mode.

NOTE: To execute another panel linking mode or to access a different remote panel, the user must first exit

this mode (return to the original control panel).

4 To exit, enter the User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [85]. After a few seconds, the keypad displays the

status of the original partition for the keypad.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

2-6

Multi-Partition Multi-Panel Mode

To perform a function in the Multi-Partition, Multi Panel mode, follow the steps below:

Step Action

1 Enter

User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [88].

The keypad displays the following:

PANELnn 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STATUS x x x x x x x x

where “nn” = panel ID number (01-08), “12345678” are the partition numbers and “xxxxxxxx” is the status of

each partition of that panel. Status indications include:

A = Armed Away S = Armed Stay M = Armed Maximum

I = Armed Instant R = Ready N = Not Ready

B = Bypassed/Ready ✴ = Alarm T = Trouble

F = Fire Alarm P = AC Power Failure L = Low System Battery

C = Comm Fail

NOTES: See table later in this section for priority of displays.

A “•” under a partition number indicates the user does NOT have access to that partition.

2 The following functions can be performed:

Press [1] to attempt to disarm all partitions.

Press [2] to attempt to arm AWAY all partitions.

Press [3] to attempt to arm STAY all partitions.

Press [4] to attempt to arm MAXIMUM all partitions.

Press [7] to attempt to arm INSTANT all partitions.

Press [✴] to read the status of the next panel.

Press [#] key to read the status of the previous panel.

Press [0] to exit mode. After a few seconds, the keypad displays the status of the original partition of the

original panel for the keypad. Also, this mode will end in approximately 120 seconds if no keys are pressed.

NOTES:

When performing any of the arming commands, if there are faults in any of the partitions, none of the

partitions will arm. These faults must be corrected or bypassed before attempting to arm.

When performing either a STAY or INSTANT arm command, the system always arms in mode 1 (see the

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP User Guide for a detailed explanation of the STAY and INSTANT arming

modes).

The user cannot execute another panel linking mode. To execute another panel linking mode or to access a

different remote panel, the user must first exit this mode (return to the original control panel).

Section 2 – Partitioning and Panel Linking

2-7

Multi-Panel View Mode

To perform a function in the Multi-Panel View mode, follow the steps below:

Step Action

1 Enter

User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [87].

The keypad displays the following typical display:

ALLPANEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STATUS x x x x x x x x

where “12345678” are the panel ID numbers and “xxxxxxxx” is the overall status of each panel. Status

indications include:

A = Armed Away S = Armed Stay M = Armed Maximum

I = Armed Instant R = Ready N = Not Ready

B = Bypassed/Ready ✴ = Alarm T = Trouble

F = Fire Alarm P = AC Power Failure L = Low System Battery

C = Comm Fail

NOTE: See table later in this section for priority of displays.

2 The following functions can be performed::

Press [1] to attempt to disarm all partitions on all panels.

Press [2] to attempt to arm AWAY all partitions on all panels.

Press [3] to attempt to arm STAY all partitions on all panels.

Press [4] to attempt to arm MAXIMUM all partitions.

Press [7] to attempt to arm INSTANT all partitions.

Press [0] to exit mode. After a few seconds, the keypad displays the status of the original partition of the

original panel for the keypad. Also, this mode will end in approximately 120 seconds if no keys are pressed.

NOTES:

When performing any of the arming commands, if there are faults in any of the partitions of a panel, the

system will not arm that panel, but will arm all the other partitions of the other panels.

When performing either a STAY or INSTANT arm command the system always arms in mode 1.

The user cannot execute another panel linking mode. In order to perform another panel linking mode or to

access a different remote panel, the user must first exit this mode (return to the original control panel).

Priority of Displays for Multi-Partition and Multi-Panel Modes

This table shows the priority of displays if more than one of these conditions exists at the same time.

Priority Description Display Priority Description Display

1 Fire Alarm F 8 Not Ready N

2 All Other Alarms ✴

9 Ready R

3 AC Loss P 10 Armed STAY S

4 Comm Fail C 11 Armed AWAY A

5 System Low Battery L 12 Armed INSTANT I

6 Trouble T 13 Armed MAXIMUM M

7 Bypass B

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

2-8

3-1

SECTION 3

Installing The Control

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

This section describes the procedures for mounting and wiring the control panel and all the peripheral devices.

NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,

and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250FBP’s features. See SECTION 1: General Description for the

table listing the differences between the VISTA-128FBP and the VISTA-250FBP control panels.

Mounting the Control Cabinet

To mount the control cabinet, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Before mounting the circuit board, remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that you will be using.

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN

INSTALLED.

2 Using fasteners or anchors (not supplied), mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall in a clean, dry area

that is not readily accessible to the general public. The back of the cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose.

ULTo provide certificated burglary service for UL installations, refer to the special requirements and

Figure 3-2

Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations

to follow.

Installing the Cabinet Lock

To install the lock, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Remove cabinet door, then remove the lock

knockout from the door. Insert the key into the

lock.

2 Position the lock in the hole, making certain

that the latch will make contact with the latch

bracket when the door is closed.

3 When correctly positioned, push the lock until

it is held securely by its snap tabs.

Use an Ademco No. K4445 Lock (supplied).

CABINET DOOR

BOTTOM

LOCKED

UNLOCKED

cab_lock_snap-001-V0

ADEMCO

PUSH

SNAP

TAB

SNAP

TAB

PUSH

ON LOCK

UNTIL IT

IS SEATED

SECURELY

STEP 2STEP 1

CHECK

POSITION

Figure 3-1: Installing the Lock

Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Guidelines

• The panel door must be supervised. Mount the

clip-on tamper switch (supplied) to the cabinet's

right side wall as shown in the diagram below, and

wire it to zone 6.

• Use a bell with a tamper-protected housing such as

the ADEMCO AB12. The bell housing's tamper

switch and inner tamper linings must also be wired

to zone 6.

• Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it

for day trouble/night alarm (zone type 5) when only

one burglary partition is used. Program it for 24-

hr. audible alarm (zone type 7) when more than one

burglary partition is used.

• All wiring between the bell and panel must be run

in conduit. Remaining wires do not need to be run

in conduit.

• All wiring that is not run in conduit must exit from

the knockout openings on the bottom or back of the

cabinet.

• All unused knockouts must be plugged using the

disc plugs and carriage bolts (supplied), as

indicated in the diagram below.

• Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet backbox

using the 18 one-inch-long Phillips-head screws

(supplied) after all wiring, programming, and

checkout procedures have been completed.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-2

BOARD

(Shows typical local Grade A listing installation)

RUN BELL WIRES

IN CONDUIT

PLUG THIS

KNOCKOUT

PLUG THIS

KNOCKOUT

PLUG THIS

KNOCKOUT

PLUG THIS

KNOCKOUT

RUN ALL REMAINING

WIRE THROUGH HERE

CLIP-ON DOOR

TAMPER SWITCH

CABINET

MOUNTING

HOLE

(4 PLACES)

TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING,

REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND INSTALL A PAIR OF

DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN.

KNOCKOUT

OPENING

HEX NUT AND

WASHER

DISC PLUGS (DIMPLES IN DISC

PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE

KNOCKOUT OPENING)

CARRIAGE BOLT

CABINET SIDE WALL

(OUTSIDE)

cabattack-001-V0

Figure 3-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations

Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Guidelines

• Follow the guidelines given above for Grade A

Mercantile Premises listing.

• Mount a shock sensor such as Sentrol No. 5402 to

the control's backbox. Follow the manufacturer's

instructions for proper sensor mounting. This

sensor also must be wired to zone 6.

• For safe and vault applications, a UL Listed

contact must be used inside the cabinet through

one of the knockouts for pry-off tamper purposes.

This sensor also must be wired to zone 6.

Installing the Control's Circuit Board

To install the circuit board in the cabinet, perform the

following steps:

Step Action

1Hang the three mounting clips on the raised

cabinet tabs. Refer to Figure 3-3 (Detail B).

Make sure the clip orientation is exactly as

shown in the diagram to avoid damage. This

will also avoid problems with insertion and

removal of the PC board.

2Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots

at the top of the cabinet. Make certain that the

board rests in the slots as indicated (Detail A).

3Swing the base of the board into the mounting

clips and secure the board to the cabinet with

the accompanying screws.

Notes:

• Make certain that the mounting screws are tight.

This ensures that there is a good ground connection

between the PC board and the cabinet.

• Dress field wiring away from the microprocessor

(center) section of the PC board. Use the loops on

the left and right sidewalls of the cabinet for

anchoring field wiring using tie wraps (Detail C).

These steps are important to minimize the risk of

panel RF interference with television reception.

DETAIL C

SIDE VIEW

OF SLOTS

DETAIL A

SIDE VIEW OF

BOARD INSERTED

INTO SLOTS

DETAIL B

SIDE VIEW OF SHORT

MOUNTING CLIPS

(TYP.)

hi_end_mnt-PCB

Figure 3-3: Mounting the PC Board

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-3

Installing the Keypads

• Up to 31 addressable keypads (addresses 00-30)

may be used (you may need to use an auxiliary

power supply if the 1A aux. output is exceeded).

• Use a 2-line alpha display, 6139/6160 (gray or red)

(check with local AHJ for approval of keypad color).

To wire the keypads, perform the following steps:

Step Action

Determine wire gauge by referring to the

Wire Run Length/Gauge table below.

Wire Run Length/Gauge Table

Wire Gauge Length

#22 gauge 450 feet

#20 gauge 700 feet

#18 gauge 1100 feet

#16 gauge 1750 feet

2 Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect

individual keypads to separate wire runs.

The maximum wire run length from the

control to a keypad, which is homerun back

to the control, must not exceed the lengths

listed in the table.

3 Run field wiring from the control to the

keypads (using standard 4-conductor cable

of the wire gauge determined in step 1).

4 Connect keypad(s) to terminals 11, 12, 13,

and 14 on the control board, see Figure 3-4.

NOTE: If using only one keypad, it may be

connected to either Keypad Port 1 or 2, and

must be mounted on, or within three feet of

the cabinet. The keypad on Port 2 is

electrically isolated from those on Port 1 and

will continue to function even if wiring

problems prevent the other keypads from

working properly.

• The length of all wire runs combined,

regardless of the wire gauge, must not

exceed 2000 feet when unshielded quad

conductor cable is used (1000 feet if

unshielded cable is run in conduit, which

acts a shield, or if shielded cable is used).

• If more than one keypad is wired to one run,

then the above maximum lengths must be

divided by the number of keypads on the run

(e.g., the maximum length is 225 feet if two

keypads are wired on a #22 gauge run).

RED

KEYPADS

BLACK

GREEN

YELLOW

CONTROL

TERMINALS

kypd_conn-001-V0

Figure 3-4: Keypad Connections to Control Panel

Addressing the Keypads

The keypads will not operate until they are

physically addressed and enabled in the

system's

Device Programming

in the

#93 Menu

Mode

Set each keypad for an individual address (00-30)

according to the keypad's instructions. Set an alpha

keypad for address 00 and other keypads for higher

addresses (00 and 01 are enabled in the system's

default program). Any keypads set for address 02 and

above will appear blank until they are enabled in the

system's program. Each keypad must be set for a

different address.

• Do not set any keypads to address 31

(nonaddressable mode). They will interfere

with other keypads (as well as other devices)

connected to the keypad terminals.

• If an “OC” or “OPEN CIRCUIT” message is

present on a keypad, data from the control is

not reaching the keypad. Please check your

wiring.

Supplementary Power Supply for Additional Keypads

When the control’s auxiliary power load for all devices

exceeds 1A, you can power additional keypads from a

regulated 12VDC power supply (e.g., ADEMCO

AD12612 (1.2A)). Use a UL Listed, battery-backed

supply for UL installations.

Connect the additional keypads as shown in Figure 3-5,

using the keypad wire colors shown. Be sure to observe

the current ratings for the power supply used.

• Make connections directly to the screw

terminals as shown in

Figure 3-5

. Make no

connection to the keypad blue wire (if

present).

• Be sure to connect the negative (–) terminal

on the power supply unit to terminal 7 (–) on

the control.

+–

11 12 13 14

SUPPLEMENTARY

POWER SUPPLY

–

CONTROL TERMINAL STRIP

AUX. AUX. DATA

IN DATA

OUT

IMPORTANT:

MAKE CONNECTIONS

DIRECTLY TO SCREW

TERMINALS AS SHOWN.

MAKE NO CONNECTION

TO THE KEYPAD BLUE

WIRE (IF PRESENT).

TO KEYPAD RED WIRE

TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE

TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE

TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE

TO KEYPAD RED WIRE

TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE

TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

pwr_sup-002-V0

Figure 3-5: Using A Supplementary Power Supply

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-4

Installing External Sounders

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP provides two

Notification Appliance Circuits for operating fire and

burglary alarm notification appliances. Each circuit is

rated as follows: 10VDC – 14VDC, 1.7A max., power-

limited. NOTE: The total alarm current drawn from

Auxiliary Power 1, Auxiliary Power 2, polling loop, Bell

1, and Bell 2 cannot exceed 2.3 amps for battery-

independent operation.

The outputs has the following options:

• Selectable for supervision.

• Selectable to activate by individual zone

assignments

• Selectable for confirmation of arming ding.

• Selectable to chime when entry/exit or perimeter

zones are faulted.

• Selectable for steady or pulsing

• Selectable for no timeout or timeout of 2-30

minutes.

If you purchased a kit containing the PS24

Power Supply Module, you may use this

module to convert one or both VISTA-

128FBP/VISTA-250FBP 12VDC, 1.7A style-Y

supervised Notification Appliance Circuits to

24VFW, 1.7A style-Y supervised Notification

Appliance Circuits.

UL• Burglary Notification Appliance Circuits

must be programmed for a timeout of 16

minutes or longer.

• Commercial fire alarm systems require

Notification Appliance Circuits to be

supervised.

ULThis control complies with National Fire

Protection Association (NFPA) requirements for

temporal pulse sounding of fire notification

appliances.

Notification Appliance Circuit Supervision

When supervision is enabled, the VISTA-

128FBP/VISTA-250FBP monitors the Notification

Appliance Circuits wiring for open and short circuit

faults while the output is inactive. The system provides

a trouble indication (Zone 970 Bell 1; 971 Bell 2) when

an open occurs; or when a short occurs between the Bell

(+) and Bell (-) terminal wiring, or between the Bell (+)

terminal wiring and earth ground.

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP indicates the

trouble condition regardless of whether the system is

armed or disarmed. The zone displays on the keypads,

reports to the event log, and transmits to the central

station (if programmed) on Partition 1. The trouble is

cleared from the display by entering the user code +

OFF.

Wiring the Alarm Output

The wiring of the Notification Appliance Circuits

depends upon whether you are going to supervise the

circuit or not. Use the appropriate procedure below for

your application.

ULUse only UL Listed sounding devices for UL

installations.

Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices

Model Device Type

ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Bell

System Sensor PA400B

(beige/PA400R (red) Indoor piezo sounder

rated at 90dB @ 10 feet.

System Sensor MA-12/24 Horn

System Sensor SS1215 ADA Strobe

System Sensor SS121575 ADA Strobe

System Sensor MASS1215 ADA Horn/Strobe

System Sensor MASS121575 ADA Horn/Strobe

System Sensor MA/SS-12 Horn/Strobe

Wheelock LS1-12-VFR Strobe

Wheelock MS1-12-VFR Strobe

Wheelock MT-12-LS-VFR Horn/Strobe

Wheelock MT4-12-LS-VFR Horn/Strobe

Wheelock MT-12-MS-VFR Horn/Strobe

WheelockMT4-12-MS-VFR Horn/Strobe

Gentex GXS-2-15 Strobe

Gentex GXS-2-1575 Strobe

Gentex SHG-12-15 Horn/Strobe

Gentex SHG-12-1575 Horn/Strobe

Faraday 5336L-U-14-12-DC Horn/Strobe

Faraday 5337-L-U-14-12-DC Horn/Strobe

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-5

BELL 2 FACTORY DEFAULTS

BELL 2 IS CONFIGURED AS A FIRE BELL CIRCUIT

USE POLARIZED INDICATING DEVICES.

CLASS B OPEN/SHORT SUPERVISION.

24-HR TROUBLE RESPONSE TO FAULTS.

ACTIVATES FOR ZONE 1-2 ALARMS (BY DEFAULT,

ZONES 1-2 ARE ASSIGNED TO FIRE PARTITION 1)

PULSED ALARM OUTPUT.

NO TIMEOUT AB12 WIRING NOTES:

DISCONNECT THE AB12'S FACTORY-WIRED CONNECTION

FROM ITS TERMINAL #4 TO ITS OUTER BOX.

SET FIELD 3* 17 TO "1" TO ENABLE ZONE 6 TAMPER FUNCTION.

ASSIGN ZONE 6 TO A BURGLARY PARTITION. PROGRAM

IT FOR DAY TROUBLE/NIGHT ALARM RESPONSE (TYPE 05)

WHEN THIS BELL IS USED BY ONLY ONE BURGLARY

PARTITION. PROGRAM IT FOR 24-HR. AUDIBLE ALARM

RESPONSE (TYPE 07) WHEN THIS BELL IS USED BY

MORE THAN ONE BURGLARY PARTITION.

ALL WIRING FROM AB12 TO PANEL MUST BE RUN IN

CONDUIT.

AB12 BELL/BOX WIRING

TO PANEL'S BELL +

TO PANEL'S BELL –

(e.g., BELL 1; TB3)

(e.g., BELL 1; TB4)

TO ZONE 6 - (TB24)

TO ZONE 6 - (TB23)

BELL

TAMPER

SWITCHES

1234 5 6

2k EOLR

AB12 OUTER BOX

INNER LINER

belloutput-003-V0

543

BELL 1 FACTORY DEFAULTS

BELL 1 IS CONFIGURED AS A BURGLARY BELL CIRCUIT

USE NONPOLARIZED GRADE A INDICATING DEVICES

(e.g., ADEMCO NO AB12 - SEE WIRING NOTES BELOW)

WIRING IS NOT SUPERVISED; CUT WHITE JUMPER, W1,

ON MAIN PCB.

ACTIVATES FOR ZONES 3-8 ALARMS (BY DEFAULT,

ZONES 3-8 ARE ASSIGNED TO BURGLARY PARTITION 1)

STEADY ALARM OUTPUT

16-MINUTE TIMEOUT.

BELL 2BELL 1 ++

2k EOLR

(MODEL 610-7)

TO PANEL'S EARTH

GROUND (TB30)

Figure 3-6: External Sounder Connections

Supervising the Notification Appliance Circuits

To wire the NAC using the supervision feature, perform

the following steps:

Step Action

1 Install a 2K EOL resistor (Model 610-7,

supplied) across the last notification

appliance on each Notification Appliance

Circuit to be supervised.

2 Program Zone 970 (Bell 1) and zone 971 (Bell

2) with a response type of 19 (24-Hour

Trouble).

Disabling the Supervision of the Notification

Appliance Circuits

To install the NAC and disable the supervision feature,

perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Cut the white jumpers W1 (for Bell 1) and W2

(for Bell 2) on the main PC board.

2 Program Zone 970 (Bell 1) and zone 971 (Bell

2) with a response type of 00.

The Notification Appliance Circuits will not

respond unless the zones are assigned to them.

For fire alarms, the system displays “FIRE ALARM

SILENCED.” This message also displays if the

Notification Appliance Circuit is not supervised.

Auxiliary Relay Connections

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP provides a built-in

Form C relay with contacts rated at 28VAC/VDC, 2.8A.

The relay may be programmed (field 3✳61) for one of

the following functions:

• Alarm Activation

• Trouble/Supervisory Activation

• 4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset

• Battery Saver

Alarm Activation

(3✳61 = 1 or 4) Steady activation in response to an

alarm.

If field 3✳61 = 1, the auxiliary relay remains active

until Aux. Relay Timeout expires or until User Code +

OFF is entered. This option can be used to provide an

unsupervised Notification Appliance Circuit for

supplementary strobes, sounders, etc. when wired to

the Aux Power 1 or a separate power supply, see Figure

3-7.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-6

If field 3✳61 = 4, the auxiliary relay remains activated

until User Code + # + 67 is entered. This option can be

used for elevator recall or ventilator shutdown on fire

alarms. By default, the relay is set to activate on alarm

zones 1-8 with no timeout (field 3✳61 = 1).

When field 3✳61 = 1, the auxiliary relay can be

programmed to give a brief activation for confirmation

of arming ding (field 3✳57) or Chime Mode (field 3✳59).

NOTES:

USE NON-POLARIZED INDICATING DEVICES.

WIRING IS NOT SUPERVISED.

DO NOT EXCEED RATINGS OF THE SUPPLY USED.

IF AUX. PWR. 1 OUTPUT IS USED, THE COMBINED

ALARM CURRENT DRAIN FROM AUX. PWR. 2,

BELL 1, AND BELL 2 CANNOT EXCEED 2.3A MAX.

belloutput-005-V0

812117

AUX RELAY FACTORY DEFAULTS

ACTIVATES FOR ZONES 1-8 ALARMS

(STEADY ALARM OUTPUT).

NO TIMEOUT.

109

AUX PWR #1

GROUND

POLE

N.O.

N.C.

CAN DRAW POWER FROM

AUX. PWR. 1 OUTPUT OR

FROM SEPARATE SUPPLY.

ALARM

Figure 3-7: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Alarm Activation

Trouble/Supervisory Activation

(3✳61 = 0) Steady activation in response to any zone or

system related trouble condition or to any fire

supervisory condition. The auxiliary relay remains

activated until all fault conditions have been corrected

and a User Code + OFF is entered.

4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset

(3✳61 = 2) Momentary (6-second) activation in response

to a second entry of a User Code + OFF sequence

following a fire alarm condition. This interrupts power

to 4-wire smoke detectors connected to hardwired zones

1-8 and polling loop zones, allowing the detectors to be

reset. Power to the detectors should be wired to the

auxiliary relay and to Aux. Power 1 output, see Figure

3-8.

Battery Saver

(3✳61 = 3) When this option is selected, the auxiliary

relay is normally activated (e.g., N.O. and pole contacts

are connected) and de-activates 4 hours after the start

of AC Loss. Using this feature, non-critical loads, such

as supplementary keypads, can be disconnected from

the auxiliary power outputs, allowing a smaller

capacity battery to be used. The relay re-activates

within a few seconds after the AC power restores.

•EOL

POWER

SUPERVISION

RELAY

MODULE

A77-716B

4-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTORS

2000

OHM

EOLR

HEAT

DETECTOR

–

BLK

ZONE

TERMINALS

(15-27)

N.O.

POLE

N.C.

Aux. Pwr 1

CONTROL

PANEL

•

SHOWN POWERED.

RELAY OPENS WHEN

POWER IS LOST

AUXILIARY RELAY

Keypad Prt 1

4_wiresmk-005-V0

Figure 3-8: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Smoke Detector Reset

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-7

Telephone Line Connections

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP provides one main

built-in dialer for communication to the central station

and one optional 5140DLM Backup Dialer, both

supervised for voltage and current on the phone lines.

Do not connect the system to telephone lines

that require ground start service.

ULFor Listed fire central station (UL864/NFPA 72)

applications, use either a Long Range Radio

(LRR) alone, the main dialer with the LRR, or

use the main dialer with the 5140DLM.

For listed fire remote station (UL864/NFPA 72)

applications, use the main dialer with the

5140DLM.

Telephone line supervision is required for UL

commercial fire alarm systems when dual line

dialer is used for fire signal transmission.

Main Dialer Connections

To connect the main dialer, refer to the Summary of

Connections diagram and perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Connect the main dialer to the telephone

company lines using the RJ31X cable

supplied.

2 If the dialer output is connected to telephone

lines that have a telephone company MTU

installed, cut the blue jumper (W6).

Installing the 5140DLM Backup Dialer

Do not connect the main dialer and the backup

dialer to the same telephone company line.

To install the 5140DLM, refer to the Summary of

Connections diagram and perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Mount the 5140DLM to the main PC board

shield.

2 Connect the backup dialer to the telephone

company lines using the RJ31X cable

supplied.

3 Connect the backup dialer to the J3 connector

on the main PC board using the ribbon cable

(supplied with the module).

4 Connect the earth ground screw on the

5140DLM to the earth ground terminal (30)

on the main PC board using 16AWG wire.

5 If the dialer output is connected to telephone

lines that have a telephone company MTU

installed, cut the blue jumper on the

5140DLM PC board.

Telephone Line Supervision

If the tip/ring voltage falls below approximately 25 volts

(13 volts if the blue jumper is cut) or the handset

current is less than approximately 10mA, the

supervision circuits for the dialer output will indicate a

fault condition. Faults on the phone lines are displayed

as zones 97 (main dialer) and 975 (backup dialer).

• To prevent risk of shock, disconnect the

phone lines at the telco jack before servicing

the panel.

• If the communicator is connected to a

telephone line inside a PABX, be sure the

PABX has backup power supply that can

support the PABX for 24 hours (central

station usage) or 60 hours (remote station

usage). Many PABXs are not power-backed

up, and connection to such a PABX results

in a communication failure if power is lost.

ULThe telephone line inputs have overvoltage

protection in accordance with UL1459, as

specified in UL985/UL1023.

Reporting Formats

The system is shipped defaulted for Contact

ID format. It is the only format capable of

uniquely reporting all 250 zones, as well as

openings and closings for all 250 users. This

requires central stations to be equipped with

the ADEMCO 685 receiver using software

level 4.10 or higher. If you need to update

your 685 Receiver, contact your distributor.

The system supports ADEMCO Low Speed 3+1; 4+1;

4+2; Sescoa/Radionics 3+1; 4+1; 4+2; ADEMCO 4+2

Express; ADEMCO High Speed; ADEMCO Contact

ID.formats

Dialer Operation

When only the main dialer is enabled (field 3✳30 = 1,0),

the system attempts to route all messages over the

main dialer output. When both the main and backup

dialers are enabled (field 3✳30 = 1,1), the system

attempts to route all calls over the main dialer output

until a fault condition is detected on the main dialer, at

which time it attempts to use the backup dialer.

The communicator makes up to 8 attempts to transmit

the messages to one or both telephone numbers

(primary and secondary), depending on the report

routing options programmed. After the 8th attempt, the

communicator hangs up and the system displays

“COMM FAIL” on the keypad. The number of dialer

attempts are programmed in field 3✳21 (default = 8;

must be restricted to 3, 4, or 5 if a secondary phone

number is programmed).

The system does not switch to the backup

dialer unless a fault condition is detected on

the main dialer. The backup dialer will not be

activated because of a programming error.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-8

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8

The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for

zones 1, 2 and 8, and 300 ohms for all other

zones (excluding the 2K EOL resistor).

To wire burglary and panic devices to zones 1-8, connect

sensors/contacts to the hardwire zone terminals (15

through 27). Connect N.C. and N.O. devices as follows:

• Connect N.C. devices in series with the high (+)

side of the loop. The 2K EOL resistor must be

connected in series with the devices, following the

last device.

• Connect N.O. devices in parallel (across) the

loop. The 2K EOL resistor must be connected

across the loop wires at the last device.

Using 2-Wire Smoke Detectors on Zones 1 and 2

Zone 1 and 2 can support up to 16 2-wire smoke

detectors each (32 total).

The alarm current on zones 1 and 2 supports

only one smoke detector in the alarmed state.

When assigned zone type 9 or 16, the second entry of a

User Code + off at a keypad interrupts power to these

zones to allow detectors to be reset following an alarm.

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors

DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL #

Photoelectric, direct-wire System Sensor 2400

Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct-wire System Sensor 2400TH

Photoelectric w/B401B base System Sensor 2451

Photoelectric w/heat sensor & B401B System Sensor 2451TH

Ionization, direct-wire System Sensor 1400

Ionization w/B401B base System Sensor 1451

Photoelectric duct detect (DH400 base) System Sensor 2451

Ionization duct detector (DH400 base) System Sensor 1451DH

Ionization, direct-wire System Sensor 1100

Ionization w/B110LP base System Sensor 1151

Photoelectric, direct-wire System Sensor 2100

Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct-wire System Sensor 2100T

Photoelectric w/B110LP base System Sensor 2151

ULThese smoke detectors are UL Listed for use

with the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP and

are the only 2-wire smoke detectors that may

be used.

Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2

2K EOL resistors must be used on fire zones

and must be connected across the loop wires

of each zone at the last detector.

To wire 2-wire smoke detectors to zone 1 and/or zone 2,

perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select 2-wire smoke detectors from the list of

compatible detectors.

2 Connect 2-wire smoke detectors across zone 1

(terminals 15 and 16), and/or zone 2

(terminals 17 and 18) as shown in Figure 3-9.

Observe proper polarity when connecting the

detectors.

3 Connect the EOL resistor at the last detector

in the loop across the zone 1 terminals. The

EOL resistor must be connected across

the loop wires at the last detector.

ZONE 1

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR

SMOKE

2000 OHMS

EOLR

2_wiresmk-001-V0

Figure 3-9: 2-Wire Smoke Detector on Zone 1 (for

zone 2 use terminals 17 & 18)

Using 4-Wire Smoke Detectors on Zones 1-8

You may use as many 4-wire smoke detectors as can be

powered from the panel's Auxiliary Power output

without exceeding the output's rating (1A).

Auxiliary power to 4-wire smoke detectors is

not automatically reset after an alarm, and

therefore must be momentarily interrupted

using either the J2 smoke detector reset output

trigger, the auxiliary relay or a 4204 Relay

Module.

Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Use any UL Listed 4-wire smoke detector that is rated

for 10-14VDC operation and that has alarm reset time

not exceeding 6 seconds. Some compatible 4-wire

smoke detectors are listed below.

Detector Type Detector Model #

Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2412

Photoelectric w/heat

sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2412TH

Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1412

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-9

Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

ULPower to 4-wire smoke detectors must be

supervised with an EOL device (use a System

Sensor A77-716B EOL relay module connected

as shown in

Figure 3-10

To wire 4-wire smoke detectors to zones 1-8, perform

the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select 4-wire smoke detectors (see list of

compatible detectors shown previously in

this section).

2 Connect detectors (including heat detectors,

if used) across terminals of the zone

selected. All detectors must be wired in

parallel. See Figure 3-10.

NOTE: If you are using the J2 output

trigger to reset the smoke detectors, refer to

Smoke Detector Reset later in this section for

the wiring instructions. If you are using the

auxiliary relay to reset the smoke detectors,

refer to Installing the Auxiliary Relay

previously in this section for wiring

instructions.

3 Connect the EOLR at the last detector in the

loop across the zone’s terminals. You must

connect the EOLR across the loop wires

at the last detector.

•

EOL

POWER

SUPERVISION

RELAY

MODULE

A77-716B

4-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTORS

2000

OHM

EOLR

HEAT

DETECTOR

–

BLK

ZONE

TERMINALS

(15-27)

N.O.

POLE

N.C.

Aux. Pwr 1

CONTROL

PANEL

•

SHOWN POWERED.

RELAY OPENS WHEN

POWER IS LOST

AUXILIARY RELAY

Keypad Prt 1

4_wiresmk-005-V0

Figure 3-10: 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Using Smoke Power Reversal Module

The 333 PRM Polarity Reversing Module is used to

reverse the polarity of the positive and negative

voltages powering smoke detectors. The module is for

use with 4-wire smoke detectors that employ a sounder

and voltage-reversing feature. The module is triggered

by a pulsing Notification Appliance Circuit.

Smoke Detectors Compatible with the 333PRM

The 333PRM may be used with the System Sensor

2112/24AT and similar models with the required

operating features previously stated.

The 333PRM reverses polarity to smoke

detectors with Integral Temp-3 Sounders.

Typically, in alarm, each draws 49-60mA of

current. The control panel supplies only enough

current for one smoke detector. In order to

attach more than one, an external power

supply and an external relay may be required.

Installing the 333 PRM

Mount the 333 PRM inside the control panel’s cabinet

or in a separate cabinet using the double-sided tape

provided. Wire the 333PRM as shown in Figure 3-11 or

Figure 3-12. Refer to the 333PRM Installation

Instructions for detailed information on the installation

of the module.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-10

333PRM-004-V0

333 PRM

9 5 812

-2

JUMPER

JUMPER P1 ON

333 MODULE

MUST BE IN

"B" POSITION

CONTROL PANEL

EOL POWER

SUPERVISION

RELAY MODULE

A77-761B

4-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTORS

2000

OHM

EOLR

TO FIRE ZONE

TERMINALS

HEAT

DETECTOR

–

SHOWN POWERED.

RELAY OPENS WHEN

POWER IS LOST

FOUR-WIRE DETECTOR CIRCUIT

Figure 3-11: Wiring a 333PRM to the Control

EOL POWER

SUPERVISION

RELAY MODULE

A77-761B

4-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTORS

2000

OHM

EOLR

TO FIRE ZONE

TERMINALS

HEAT

DETECTOR

–

SHOWN POWERED.

RELAY OPENS WHEN

POWER IS LOST

333PRM-005-V0

POWER

SUPPLY 333 PRM

-2

JUMPER

USE A 12VDC,

BATTERY-BACKED,

UL LISTED POWER

SUPPLY.

JUMPER P1 ON

333 MODULE

MUST BE IN

"B" POSITION

FOUR-WIRE DETECTOR CIRCUIT

CONTROL PANEL

89 5

12 10

Figure 3-12: Wiring a 333PRM using a Power Supply

Zone 6 Tamper Configuration

Zone 6 may be used as a tamper loop for the VISTA-

128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Cabinet Door Tamper Switch

and for the ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Burglary Bell Box

Tamper Switches and Tamper Liner. The bell Housing’s

tamper switch and inner tamper linings must also be

wired to zone 6.

Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it for

day trouble/night alarm (zone type 5) when only one

burglary partition is used. Program it for 24-hr.

audible alarm (zone type 7) when more than one

burglary partition is used. Enable the Zone 6 Alternate

Tamper Function (program field 3✳17.

When set in this manner, and the zone senses an open

or short, or an earth ground fault occurs by drilling

through the AB12 housing, the system triggers a

trouble when the system is disarmed and an alarm

when it is armed. (See the Installing the External

Sounders for wiring the ADEMCO AB12.)

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-11

Using 2-Wire Latching Glassbreaks on Zone 8

Zone 8 can support 2-wire glassbreak detectors. The

zone provides enough standby current to power up to 50

2-wire glassbreak detectors meeting the requirements

listed below.

Compatible Glassbreak Detectors

Use detectors that meet the following ratings:

Standby Voltage: 5VDC–13.8VDC

Standby Resistance: Greater than 20k ohms (equivalent

resistance of all detectors in parallel)

Alarm Resistance: Less than 1.1k ohms (see note below)

Alarm Current: 2mA–10mA

Reset Time: Less than 6 seconds

NOTES:

• You can use detectors that exceed 1.1k ohms in

alarm, provided they maintain a voltage drop of

less than 3.8 volts in alarm.

• The IEI 735L Series detectors have been tested and

found to be compatible with these ratings.

GLASSBREAK

DETECTOR ZONE 8 (+)

(-)

LATCHING TYPE GLASS

BREAK DETECTOR LOOP

2000

OHMS

EOLR

glass_conn-001-V0

Figure 3-13: Wiring Latching Glassbreaks to Zone 8

• The alarm current provided by zone 8

supports only one glassbreak detector in

the alarmed state.

• Do not use other N.O. or N.C. contacts

when using glassbreak detectors on zone

8. Other contacts may prevent proper

glassbreak detector operation.

To wire 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors to zone 8,

perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select compatible 2-wire glassbreak

detectors that meet the requirements stated

previously.

2 Connect detectors across zone 8 (terminals

27 and 28). See Figure 3-13.

3 Connect the EOL resistor at the last

detector in the loop across the zone’s

terminals. You must connect the EOL

resistor across the loop wires at the last

detector.

Tamper Supervision for the Hardwired Zones

The system can be programmed to monitor for either an

open condition or a short condition of a tamper switch

on zones 1-8. End-of-line supervision is required for this

option.

Wiring a Tamper Switch to Zones 1-8

The wiring of the tamper switch depends on whether

the tamper switch and the sensor are normally open or

normally closed.

• If you are using a normally closed sensor, the

tamper switch must be normally open. Refer to

Figure 3-14 for the wiring configuration.

• If you are using a normally open sensor, the

tamper switch must be normally closed. Refer to

Figure 3-15 for the wiring configuration.

To wire a tamper switch on a hardwired zone, connect

the EOL resistor at the last detector in the loop across

the zone’s terminals. You must connect the EOL

resistor at the last detector for proper operation

of the tamper supervision.

NOTE: For the normally closed sensor, program

the zone for trouble on short. For the normally open

sensor, program the zone for trouble on open.

NOTE: For zones with a response type of 9 or 16 (Fire),

the tamper selection must be “0” none.

2k EOLR

TAMPER

SWITCH

SENSOR

Figure 3-14: Wiring a Normally Closed Sensor Loop

for Tamper Supervision

2k EOLR

TAMPER

SWITCH

SENSOR

Figure 3-15: Wiring a Normally Open Sensor Loop

for Tamper Supervision

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-12

Installing RPM Devices

The polling loop provides both power and data to the

RPM devices, and is constantly monitoring the status of

all zones enabled on the loop. The maximum current

draw of all devices on the polling loop cannot total more

than 128mA (unless the system uses a 4297 Polling

Loop Extender Module).

Devices that can be programmed via either DIP

switches or the built-in unique serial number

must be set for serial number mode operation.

All devices on the polling loop must be wired in parallel

to the [+] and [-] polling loop terminals of the control

panel (28 and 29). You can wire from device to device,

or have multiple branches connected directly to the

control panel in a star configuration.

Do not run polling loop wires within 6” of AC

power, telephone, or intercom wiring. The

polling loop is carrying data between the control

panel and the devices, interference on this loop

can cause an interruption of this communication.

The polling loop can also cause outgoing

interference on the intercom or phone lines. If

this spacing cannot be achieved, shielded wire

must be used. (Note that the maximum total

wire length supported is cut in half when

shielded wire is used.)

The Quest 2260SN can be programmed as a

“Smart Contact” in

Zone Progamming

. This

prevents those PIRs from displaying faults

during the disarmed state. You cannot mix

Quest 2260SN “Smart Contacts” with non-

“Smart Contacts” in the system.

UL• The 4208 must be mounted either inside the

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP cabinet or in a

separate enclosure that has a tamper-

supervised cover.

• The 4190WH right loop must not be used, and

the left loop must be EOLR-supervised.

• The 4278 right loop cannot be used.

• The 4194 is not UL Listed.

• The 4297 must be powered from the VISTA-

128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Auxiliary Power Output

or from a UL Listed supplementary power

supply.

• The 7500 and 9500 detectors are not UL Listed.

• Twisted-pair is recommended for all wire runs.

• No more than 64mA may be drawn on any

individual wire run.

• When a star configuration is used, the total

length of all wire runs combined cannot exceed

4000 ft (2000 ft. if you are using unshielded wire

in conduit or shielded wire).

Compatible Polling Loop Devices

Model

Number Type

4208 8-Zone Expander

4190WH 2-Zone Expander

4278 Quad PIR

4275 Dual PIR

4194 Surface-Mount Reed Contact (Wide Gap)

4297 Extender Module

4192SD Photoelectric Smoke Detector Devices

4192SDT Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat Detector

4192SDTM Same as above and provides maintenance

signals

5192 Same as above and provides maintenance

signals

4192CP Ionization Smoke Detector

4192CPM Same as above and provides maintenance

signals

4101SN Serial Number Single-Output Relay Module

4208U Universal 8-Zone Expander

4939SN-BR

4939SN-GY

Serial Number Surface-Mount Reed Contacts

4191SN-

WH Serial Number Recessed Reed Contact

4959SN Aluminum Overhead Door Contact

7500 Single Technology Glassbreak Detector

9500 Dual Technology Glassbreak Detector

4209U Universal Group Zoning Module

4193SN Serialized 2-Zone Expander

4293SN Serialized 1-Zone Expander

4190SN Serialized 2-Zone Expander

998MX Serialized PIR

To install polling loop devices, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select devices from the list of compatible

devices shown previously.

2 Set the DIP switches in the device (if

required). Refer to the device’s instructions

for the DIP Switch Tables.

3 Mount each device in the desired location.

Refer to the device’s instructions.

Run wires from the control panel to each

device on the polling loop (see Figure 3-16).

No individual wire run may exceed the

lengths shown in the following table.

Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs

Wire Gauge Max. Length

#22 gauge 650 feet

#20 gauge 950 feet

#18 gauge 1500 feet

#16 gauge 2400 feet

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-13

Step Action

5 Wire each device to the polling loop, making

sure of the correct polarity (refer to the

device’s instructions).

NOTE: If you are using serial number

devices, and intend to enroll each device

through the keypad automatically, wire no

more than 25 of these devices to the

control at a time. Then power up and

program them before connecting the next 25.

Leave previously enrolled devices connected.

If you intend to manually enter the serial

numbers through the keypad or through

Compass downloading software, all the

devices may be connected before powering

up to program.

4192SD

SMOKE

4190

RPM

4278

PIR

25 26

POLLING LOOP

TO RIGHT LOOP

polling_loop-002-V0

Figure 3-16: Polling Loop Connections to the

Control Panel

Polling Loop Supervision

A short on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble on

zone 997 and reports as a trouble condition only. If

annunciation is desired, program the zone as type 05 or

type 19.

If a device on the polling loop fails (the panel cannot

"see" that device), the system displays a trouble

condition for all zones on that device. If the panel is

armed when a device fails, and the zone is a burglary

zone, the will go into alarm

A trouble on zone 997 prevents a partition from

being armed, unless all polling loop zones on

that partition are bypassed.

Using the 4297 Polling Loop Extender

The 4297 Polling Loop Extender may be used to provide

additional polling loop current, to extend the polling

loop wire run length, and/or to provide individual

electrically isolated polling loops. Refer to Figures 3-17

and 3-18, to follow.

DO NOT use the 4197 Polling Loop Extender

module with the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-

250FBP

Be sure to include the total current drawn on

the polling loop when figuring the total auxiliary

load on the panel’s power supply.

CONTROL PANEL

RPM

INPUT POLLING LOOP EXTENSION POLLING LOOP

RPM 4297 RPM RPM

OTHER

RPMS

INPUT LOOP LIMITS: EXTENSION POLLING LOOP LIMITS = SAME AS INPUT LOOP

• 128 mA MAX. LIMIT CURRENT TO 64mA ON ANY

INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN.

• NO MORE THAN 64 DEVICES MAY BE USED.

NO INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN CAN EXCEED:

•

•TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS COMBINED CANNOT

EXCEED 4000FT. (2000FT. IF USING SHIELDED WIRE)

GAUGE LENGTH

#22 650 FT

#20 950 FT

#18 1500 FT

#16 2400 FT

• NO MORE THAN119 DEVICES COMBINED.

• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON BOTH

LOOPS COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT.

(3200 FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED ). WIRE IN

CONDUIT, OR IF USING SHIELDED WIRE

polling_loop_003-V1

COMBINED INPUT AND EXTENSION LOOP LIMITS:

Figure 3-17: Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-14

CONTROL PANEL

EXTENSION POLLING LOOP #1

4297

RPM

COMBINED INPUT AND EXTENSION LOOP LIMITS:

•NO MORE THAN 119 DEVICES COMBINED ON THE INPUT LOOP AND EXTENSION

LOOP #1. NO MORE THAN 119 DEVICES COMBINED ON THE INPUT LOOP AND

EXTENSION LOOP #2.

• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON THE INPUT LOOP AND EXTENSION LOOP #1

COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT. (3200 FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN

CONDUIT, OR SHIELDED WIRE). TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON THE INPUT

LOOP AND EXTENSION LOOP #2 COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT. (3200 FT. IF

USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN CONDUIT, OR SHIELDED WIRE).

4297

RPM

INPUT POLLING LOOP

•DO NOT CONNECT 4297 MODULES IN

SERIES (i.e., DO NOT CONNECT ONE

MODULE'S EXTENSION LOOP TO

ANOTHER MODULE'S INPUT LOOP.)

polling_loop-004-V1

EXTENSION POLLING LOOP #2

Figure 3-18: Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules

NOTE: The input loop limits stated in Figure 3-17 apply to Figure 3-18 as well.

Wireless Zone Expansion

ULThe 5881ENHC RF Receiver and the 5869 Holdup

Switch Transmitter are listed for UL Commercial

Burglary applications. All other RF receivers and

transmitters are not listed for UL Commercial

Burglary applications.

The following table lists the receivers that may be used

and the number of zones they support.

5800 Series Receivers

Receiver Zones

5881L up to 8

5881M up to 16

5881H up to 250

5881ENHC up to 250 (use with UL864 installations

In Canada, 5800 systems must use 5882

Series receivers. Information about the 5881

Receivers applies as well to the 5882

Receivers. Both receivers use the same

transmitters.

RF System Operation and Supervision

The 5800 RF system operation has the following

characteristics:

• The receiver responds to a frequency of 345MHz.

• The receiver has a nominal range of 200 feet.

• Supervised transmitters send a supervisory signal

every 70-90 minutes.

• Zones 988 and 990 are used to supervise the RF

reception of receivers 2 and 1, respectively. The

reception is supervised for the following two

conditions:

1. The receiver goes “deaf” (doesn’t hear from any

transmitter) within a programmed interval of time

(defined by program field 1*30).

2. Proper RF reception is impeded (i.e., jamming or

other RF interference). The control checks for this

condition every 45 seconds.

ULA response type (05 Day/Night) must be

programmed for zones 990 (1st receiver) and

988 (2nd receiver) for UL installations.

• The 5881ENHC receiver contains front and back

tampers that permit its use in commercial burglary

installations.

• You may only mount the 5881ENHC its own plastic

housing. Otherwise, the receiver constantly reports

a tamper condition.

• The control checks the receiver connections about

every 45 seconds. The receiver supervisory zone is 8

+ 2-digit receiver device address (for example,

Device address 05 = supervisory zone 805).

NOTE: This zone must be programmed with a

response type (e.g., type 05 Day/Night Trouble)

before it supervises the connection to the receiver.

• Use two identical receivers to provide either a

greater area of coverage or redundant protection.

They must be set for different addresses.

• Any zone from 1 to 250 can be used as a 5800

Series wireless zone, with the exception of zone 64

(reserved for a wireless keypad).

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-15

RF System Installation Advisories

• Place the receiver in a high, centrally located area.

Do not place it on or near metal objects. This will

decrease the range and/or block transmissions.

• Install the RF receiver at least 10 feet from the

control panel or any keypads, to avoid interference

from the microprocessors in these units.

• If dual receivers are used:

a. Both must be at least 10 feet from each other,

as well as from the control panel and remote

keypads.

b. Each receiver must be set to a different device

address. The receiver set to the lower address

is considered the 1st RF receiver for

supervisory purposes.

c. The House IDs must be the same.

d. Using two receivers does not increase the

number of transmitters the system can support

(249 zones using the 5881H, plus a wireless

keypad).

5881ENHC-001-V0

SCREW

Figure 3-19: Installing the 5881ENHC with Tamper

Protection

Installation and Setup of the 5881 RF Receivers

Take note of the address you select for the RF

receiver, as this address must be enabled in

the system’s

Device Programming

in the

#93

Menu Mode

To install the 5881 RF receiver, perform the following

steps:

Step Action

1 Mount the receiver, following the advisories

stated previously.

2 Set the DIP switches in the receiver for the

address (01-07). See Figure 3-20.

Make sure the address setting is not

being used by another device (keypad,

relay module, etc.).

3If installing a 5881ENHC, install a flat-

head screw (supplied) in the case tamper tab

as shown in Figure 3-19. When the receiver is

pried from the wall, the tamper tab will break

off and remain on the wall. This will activate

a tamper switch in the receiver and cause

generation of a tamper signal. Note that this

signal will also be generated when the

receiver’s front cover is removed.

4 Connect the receiver’s wire harness to the

keypad terminals (11, 12, 13 and 14). Plug

the connector at the other end of the harness

into the receiver.

5 Refer to the Installation Instructions

provided with the receiver for installations

regarding antenna mounting, etc.

TO CONTROL'S REMOTE KEYPAD

CONNECTION POINTS. EACH RECEIVER

MUST BE ON INDIVIDUAL HOME RUN.

USE MAX. of 220 ft. [67m of #22 (0.64mm)

WIRE or 550 ft. (168m) of #18 (1mm) WIRE

FOR EACH RUN. OBSERVE 20 ft. MAX.

FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS.

(SEE RECEIVER'S INSTRUCTIONS.)

DIP SWITCH WHITE AREAS = SWITCH

HANDLES. POSITION 2-4 DETERMINE

RECEIVER'S ADDRESS. CONSULT

CONTROL'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR

ADDRESS TO USE. DIP SWITCH BELOW

SHOWN SET FOR ADDRESS "0."

SWITCH

POSITION RECEIVER ADDRESS SETTINGS

(" - " MEANS OFF)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

PRESENT ONLY ON 5881EH (SEE TEXT AT LEFT)

ON ON ON

ONON

ONON ONON

ONON

FOR FUTURE USE

DIP SWITCH #5 (PRESET ONLY ON 5881EH)

ON: SETS 5881EH FOR USE IN COMMERCIAL

FIRE APPLICATIONS (SEE THE RECEIVER'S

INSTRUCTIONS)*.

OFF: USE IN NON-COMMERCIAL FIRE

INSTALLATIONS.

* FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE APPLICATIONS

THE 5881EH PC BOARD MUST BE MOUNTED

IN A SEPARATE CABINET (SEE RECEIVER'S

INSTRUCTIONS FOR DETAILS).

MOUNTING

HOLES

INSERT IN

RIGHT-HAND

TERMINALS

CIRCUIT

BOARD

DIP SWITCH

YELLOW

RED

BLACK

GREEN

INTERFERENCE

INDICATOR LED

WIRING

OPENING

PLUG & SOCKET

ANTENNAS

5881-001-V0

Figure 3-20: 5881 RF Receiver (cover removed)

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-16

Installing the 5800TM Module

Installation of this module is necessary only if you are

using a 5827BD or 5804BD Bi-directional device.

This address for the 5800TM must be enabled

in the control’s

Device Programming

in the

#93

Menu Mode

as a keypad and then assigned to

a partition.

To install the 5800TM, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Mount the unit using its accompanying

mounting bracket near the RF receiver.

The 5800TM must not be installed within

the control cabinet. It must be between

one and two feet from the receiver’s

antennas.

2 Set the module for the appropriate address.

For Address Setting 28 cut the red jumper;

for Address 29 cut the white jumper; for

Address 30 cut both jumpers.

Make sure the address setting is not

being used by another device (keypad,

relay module, etc.).

3 Connect the module’s wire harness to the

keypad terminals (11, 12, 13 and 14). Plug

the connector at the other end of the harness

into the module.

House ID Sniffer Mode

This mode applies only if you are using a wireless

keypad (5827/5827BD). Use the House ID Sniffer mode

to make sure you do not choose a House ID that is in

use in a nearby system. The House ID must be

programmed for the receiver in Device Programming in

the #93 Menu Mode.

To enter House ID Sniffer mode, enter your Installer

Code + [#] + [2].

The receiver now “sniffs” out any House IDs in the area

and displays them. Keep the receiver in this mode for

about 2 hours. Use a House ID that is not displayed.

Exit the Sniffer mode by entering your Installer Code

+ OFF.

As Sniffer mode effectively disables RF point

reception, Sniffer mode cannot be entered

while any partition is armed.

5800 Series Transmitter Setup

• Transmitters have built-in serial numbers that

must be enrolled in the system using the #93 Menu

Mode Programming, or via the downloader.

• Transmitters do not have DIP switches (except

5827, described separately).

• Some transmitters can support more than one

“zone” (loops or inputs) (e.g., 5816, 5817). Each loop

must be assigned a different zone number.

• For button-type transmitters (wireless keys), such

as the 5804 and 5804BD, you must assign a unique

zone number to each individual button used on the

transmitter.

The 5808 smoke detector can be programmed

as a “Smart Contact” in

Zone Progamming

This enables the detector to monitor

maintenance signals and may prevent false

alarms from a “dirty” detector.

Transmitter Supervision

Supervised RF transmitters send a check-in signal to

the receiver at 70–90 minute intervals. If at least one

check-in is not received from each supervised

transmitter within a programmed period (field 1∗31),

the “missing” transmitter number(s) and “CHECK” or

“TRBL” are displayed. Unsupervised RF transmitters

(5802MN, 5804) may be carried off the premises.

Some transmitters have built-in tamper protection, and

annunciate a “CHECK” or “TRBL” condition if covers

are removed.

If a loss of supervision occurs on a transmitter

programmed for Fire, it reports in Contact ID as

a Fire Trouble (373), not Loss of Supervision

(381), to the central station.

Transmitter Input Types

All transmitters have one or more unique factory-

assigned input (loop) codes. Transmitters can be

programmed as one of the following types:

Type Description

(RF Motion) Sends periodic check-in signals, fault and low-

battery signals. The control panel

automatically restores the zone to “ready” after

a few seconds. It is intended for facilities with

multiple motion detectors that may fault and

restore simultaneously. The transmitter must

remain within the receiver’s range.

NOTE: RF Motion may only be used on

loop 1 of a door/window type transmitter.

(Supervised

RF)

Sends periodic check-in signals, fault,

restore, and low-battery signals. The

transmitter must remain within the receiver’s

range.

(Unsupervised

RF)

Sends all the signals that the RF type does,

but the control does not supervise the

check-in signals. The transmitter may be

carried off-premises.

(Unsupervised

Button RF)

These send only fault signals. They do not

send low-battery signals until they are

activated. The transmitter may be carried

off-premises.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-17

Transmitter Battery Life

Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4

to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and

the specific wireless device being used. Factors such as

humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large

swings in temperature may all reduce the actual

battery life in a given installation.

The wireless system can identify a true low battery

situation, thus allowing the dealer or user of the system

time to arrange a change of battery and maintain

protection for that point within the system.

Some transmitters (e.g., 5802, 5802CP, and 5803)

contain long-life but nonreplaceable batteries. At the

end of their life, the complete unit must be replaced

(and a new serial number enrolled at the control).

Button-type transmitters (e.g., 5801, 5802, 5802CP and

5803) should be periodically tested, as these

transmitters do not send supervisory check-in signals.

To test the transmitters using the Transmitter

ID Sniffer mode and the Go/NoGo Test Mode,

see the

SECTION 10: Testing the System

for

the procedures.

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters

Model Product Input Type

5801 Panic Transmitter UR or RF

5802

5802CP

Pendant (Personal Emerg. Xmitter)

Belt Clip (Personal Emerg. Xmitter)

BR Only

5802MN Miniature (Personal Emerg. Xmitter) UR or RF

5802MN2 Miniature (Personal Emerg. Xmitter) UR or RF

5804 Wireless Key Transmitter BR Only

5804BD Wireless Key Bi-directional

Transmitter BR Only

5804BDV Wireless Key Bi-directional

Transmitter with Voice BR Only

5806/5807/

5808 Photoelectric Smoke Detectors.

5808 is UL Listed for Fire RF

Model Product Input Type

5816 Door/Window Transmitter RF

5816MN Miniature Door/Window Transmitter

5816TEMP Temperature Sensor Transmitter

5817 Multi-Point Universal Transmitter RF

5818 Recessed Transmitter RF

5827 Wireless Keypad House ID

5827BD Wireless Bi-directional Keypad House ID

5849 Glassbreak Detector RF

5850 Glassbreak Detector RF

5890 PIR Detector RF

5890PI PIR Detector with Pet Immunity RF

Installing Output Devices

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP supports up to 96

outputs. Each device must be programmed as to how to

act (ACTION), when to activate (START), and when to

deactivate (STOP). The 4204, 4204CF, FSA-8, FSA-24,

and/or 4140SN may be used as output devices.

NOTE: The first 32 of the 96 Output Devices may

be supervised (zones 601-632). Only the relays on

4204CF modules may be supervised. If

supervision is programmed for other types of

Output Devices, unpredictable results may occur.

Installing the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules

Each 4204 module provides 4 relays with Form C

(normally open and normally closed) contacts. Each

4204CF module adds two style Y supervised

Notification Appliance Circuits to the system. For

4204CF modules, only relays 1 and 3 on each module

can be programmed.

The relay module will not operate until the

device address you have set the DIP switches

for is enabled in the control’s

Device

Programming

in the

#93 Menu Mode

To install the relay modules, see Figures 3-21 and 3-22

and perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Set the 4204 or 4204CF’s DIP switches for a

device address 01-15.

Do not use an address being used by another

device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).

2 Mount the 4204 and 4204CF modules per the

instructions provided with them.

Connect the module’s wire harness to the

control (11, 12, 13 and 14). Plug the connector

on the harness to the module.

When mounting remotely, homerun each

module to the control. The table below shows

the maximum wire run lengths. Refer to the

instructions provided with the 4204CF for its

maximum permissible wire lengths.

Wire Gauge Maximum Length

#22 125 feet

#20 200 feet

#18 300 feet

#16 500 feet

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-18

SWITCH 4204 ADDRESS SETTINGS

POSITION ("—" means "OFF")

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON —

ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — —

ON ON ON ON — — — — ON ON ON ON — — — —

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON — — — — — — — —

12345

➞

13 14 15 16

OFF

➞

DIP SWITCH

FOR SETTING DEVICE ADDRESS

AND ENABLING/DISABLING TAMPER

➞

COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH

➞

TB1

4204

TB2

4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG

➞

121110987654321

▲

RELAY

TYPICAL

(SHOWN "OFF")

EITHER OR BOTH

CAN BE USED

➞

DATA IN

FROM CONTROL

(–) GROUND

DATA OUT

TO CONTROL

(+) 12V

YEL

BLK

GRN

RED

Figure 3-21: 4204 Relay Module

SWITCH 4204CF ADDRESS SETTINGS

POSITION ("—" means "OFF")

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON —

ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — —

ON ON ON ON — — — — ON ON ON ON — — — —

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON — — — — — — — —

12345

➞

OFF

➞

13 14 15 16

DIP SWITCH

FOR SETTING DEVICE

ADDRESS AND

ENABLING/DISABLING

TAMPER

➞

COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH

➞

TB1

TB2

4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG

➞

121110987654321

▲

EITHER OR BOTH

CAN BE USED

➞

DATA IN

FROM CONTROL

(–) GROUND

DATA OUT

TO CONTROL

YEL

BLK

GRN

RED (+) 12V; SUPPLIES POWER TO MODULE

CIRCUITRY (INCLUDING NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE RELAY COILS). CURRENT

DRAIN AT 12V IS: 25 mA + (80 mA PER

ACTIVE OUTPUT)

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE AND

CONSOLE DATA OUTPUTS ARE

POWER LIMITED

–

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE B

2K EOLR

#610-7

POLARIZED

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE

–

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE A

2K EOLR

#610-7

}

–

POWER FOR

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A,

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE B

8-28VDC OR VFW. UP TO 2.4A

DEPENDING ON BELL CURRENT

- ALARM POLARITY

SHOWN

- EACH OUTPUT

PROVIDES

STYLE Y

SUPERVISION

- EACH OUTPUT

RATED 1.2A MAX

- USE

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCES

COMPATIBLE

WITH

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE

POWER SUPPLY

VOLTAGE

RATING

Figure 3-22: 4204CF Relay Module

Installing the FSA Modules

The 8-zone LED Fire System Annunciator FSA-8 and

24-zone LED Fire System Annunciator FSA-24 enable a

fire response unit to identify quickly the point/zone of a

fire. These indicators may be used for other functions as

well, such as status indication. A maximum of 4 FSA

modules, in any combination, can be supported.

To install the FSA module, refer to Figure 3-23 and

perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Set the FSA’s DIP switches for a device

address from 08 to 23. See the module’s

instructions for the DIP switch table.

Do not use an address being used by another

device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).

2 Mount the FSA module horizontally to a

duplex box (quad box for FSA-24).

3 Connect the module to the control’s keypad

terminals (11, 12, 13 and 14).

00000

ECP Bus

Dip Switch

Optional

Keyswitch

Connection

SIDE

VIEW

All Switches shown

in Up position.

(ECP Address 23)

Terminal

Block

Connect to

Keypad

Terminals

Figure 3-23: Wiring the FSA Module

The FSA module will not operate until the device

address you have set the DIP switches for is

enabled in the control’s

Device Programming

the

#93 Menu Mode

Installing 4101SN Relay Modules

The 4101SN V-Plex Single Output Relay Module is a

serial number polling loop output device. The 4101SN

features the following:

The position of the relay is supervised, but not

the actual external contact wiring.

• Form C relay contacts rated at 2A, 28VAC/VDC

with contact supervision.

• One class B/style B EOLR-supervised auxiliary

input zone.

• Operating power and communication with control

panels via the V-Plex polling loop.

• Electronics mounted in a small plastic case with

tamper-protected cover.

• If are using ZONE # for the START of a

polling loop output, and want the output to

stop when the same zone restores, the

STOP programming must be blank.

• No more than 20 polling loop outputs may

be programmed for the same START or

STOP condition in

Output Programming

Connect the device to the polling loop, terminals 28 (+)

and 29 (-). Be sure to observe polarity

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-19

Installing a Remote Keyswitch

A UL-Listed remote keyswitch, such as the ADEMCO

4146, can be used for remote arming/disarming of the

burglary part of the system and for silencing alarms.

The keyswitch operates in only one particular partition.

The keyswitch is wired across zone 7. This zone is no

longer available as a protection zone. Be sure to

program Zone 7 with a response type (e.g., type 10).

Operation

• A momentary short arms the partition in the

AWAY mode, and a short held for more than 10

seconds arms the partition in STAY mode 1. A

subsequent short disarms the partition.

• The keyswitch LEDs indicate the partition’s status

(see table that follows).

• A momentary short silences Notification Appliance

Circuits and keypad sounds, and disarms the

system if it was armed. A subsequent short clears

the alarm memory indication and resets 2-wire

smoke and glassbreak detectors (if used).

• The keyswitch can be used to silence fire alarms

without disarming the burglary portion (program a

“9” in field ✳15). A momentary short silences alarm

outputs only if a fire alarm is present.

ULIn UL commercial fire installations, mount the

keyswitch next to the keypad. The keypad

displays the UL-required “FIRE BELL

SILENCED” when the keyswitch is used to

silence a fire alarm.

LED Indications

Green Red Indication

On Off Disarmed & Ready

Off Off Disarmed & Not Ready

Off On Steady Armed Away

Off Slow Flash Armed Stay

Off Rapid Flash Alarm Memory

The keyswitch reports as user 0, if Open/Close

reporting is enabled in field ✳40.

Keyswitch Tamper Operation

The tamper switch need not be used for fire or UL

Household Burglary installations. For UL Commercial

Burglary installations, the tamper switch must be

wired to zone 6, see Figure 3-24).

Program zone 6 for Day Trouble/Night Alarm (response

type 5). When the keyswitch is removed from the wall,

the tamper switch opens, causing an alarm or trouble

on the zone. This also causes the control to disable

keyswitch operation until the tamper is restored and

the associated partition is disarmed.

Wiring for the Remote Keyswitch

To install the ADEMCO 4146 keyswitch, perform the

following steps:

Step Action

1 Connect the ADEMCO 4146 to the panel as

shown in Figure 3-24.

2 If you are using the tamper, make sure it is

connected to a zone.

4146 KEYSWITCH

(READY)

GREEN

(ARMED)

RED

TO ZONE 8 + (TERM 27)

TO OUT 5 (J2 PIN 6)

TO ZONE 7 + (TERM 25)

TO ZONE 7/ZONE 8 - (TERM 26)

TO GND (J2 PIN 8)

TO OUT 1 (J2 PIN 7)

4146_keyswitch-001-V0

2000

OHMS

EOLR

2000

OHMS

820

OHMS

820

OHMS

TAMPER

SWITCH

(N.C.)

LOCK

SWITCH (N.O.)

Figure 3-24: Remote Keyswitch Wiring

Installing a 5140LED Indicator Module

An optional 5140LED Indicator Module can be installed

in municipalities, which require dedicated indicators for

communicator fault status. The 5140LED provides the

following indicators:

• AC POWER:

• ON if AC Power is present.

• OFF if AC Power is not present.

• COMM FAILURE:

• ON if maximum number of attempts were made

(field 3✳21) to transmit a message to the central

station. Enter User Code + OFF following a

successful transmission to turn off.

• OFF is normal.

• DIALER 1 FAULT:

• ON if main dialer line is faulted. Correct problem

and then enter User Code + OFF to turn off.

• OFF if normal.

• DIALER 2 FAULT

• ON if backup dialer line is faulted. Correct

problem, and then enter User Code + OFF to

turn off.

• OFF if normal.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-20

Wiring for the 5140LED Indicator Module

Program “2” field 3✳20 and connect the 5140LED

Module to the J2 connector as shown in Figure 3-25. It

is designed for mounting into a standard single-gang

electrical box.

To install the 5140LED Indicator Module, perform the

following steps:

Step Action

1 Pull wires from the control panel’s J2

connector through an opening ion the single-

gang box and splice these wires to the modules

flying leads. Solderless splices may be used.

2 Mount the module’s PC board onto one side of

the PC board retainer bracket (supplied).

3 Slide the PC board retainer bracket into the

box and fasten with screws (supplied).

4 Mount the stainless steel decorative cover

(supplied) onto the box.

5140LED MODULE

AC POWER

4142 TR CABLE

4142 TR CABLE WIRE COLORS

AC POWER BROWN

DIALER 2 FAULT GREEN

COMM FAILURE ORANGE

DIALER 1 FAULT YELLOW

COMM FAILURE

DIALER 1 FAULT

DIALER 2 FAULT

FUTURE USE

BLUE

RED

BLACK

5140LED MODULE

WIRE COLORS

TO AUX

PWR 1

OUTPUT

–

(TO TERM 11)

(TO TERM 12)

123456789

INPUT 1

GROUND

OUT 1

OUT 4

OUT 7

OUT 3

OUT 6

OUT 2

OUT 5

J2 CONNECTOR

VIOLET

GRAY

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

GREEN

BROWN

BLUE

BLACK

J2_trigcon-003-V0

Figure 3-25: Wiring the 5140LED Indicator Module

Installing a Remote Keypad Sounder

An optional Amseco PAL 328N Piezo Sounder can be

used to duplicate the sounds produced by the keypad’s

built-in sounder. The remote sounder will duplicate all

sounds (such as alarms, trouble beeps, etc.) except for

the short beeps associated with keypad key depression.

One application of this feature would be to produce

chime beeps at a distant location from the keypads.

If used, program field 3✳20 must be set to “0” and field

✳15 must be set to the desired partition number.

The remote sounder must be connected to the Output 5

on the J2 connector as shown in Figure 3-26.

123456 78 9

(GRAY)

(YELLOW)

(WHITE)

(RED)

(VIOLET)

(GREEN)

(BROWN)

BLUE

BLACK

J2 CONNECTOR

AMSECO PAL-328N

PIEZO SOUNDER

(10MA)

4142TR CABLE

J2_trigcon-006-V0

GROUND

OUT 1

OUT 5

OUT 2

INPUT 1

OUT 6

OUT 3

OUT 7

OUT 4

BLACK

RED

Figure 3-26: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring

Installing the VA8200 Panel Link Module

The VA8200 Panel Link Module (PLM) connects to the

keypad (ECP) terminals on the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-

250FBP and also connects to other PLMs via the RS-

485 bus (3-wire twisted cable run). Figure 3-27 is a

block diagram of a panel linking setup using three

control panels.

ULPanel Linking is not permitted in UL

installations.

CONTROL

PANEL

CONSOLE

PLM

CONTROL

PANEL

CONSOLE

PLM

CONTROL

PANEL

CONSOLE PLM

ECP

RS-485

PLG-001-V0

Figure 3-27: Panel Linking Block Diagram

ECP Wire Run Limitations

Determine wire gauge by referring to the table below.

Wire Run Length Table

Wire Gauge Length

#22 gauge 450 feet

#20 gauge 700 feet

#18 gauge 1100 feet

#16 gauge 1750 feet

• The length of the ECP wire runs combined

must not exceed 2000 feet when unshielded

cable is used (1000 feet if unshielded cable is

run in conduit or if shielded cable is used).

• If more than one ECP device is wired to a

single run, then the above maximum lengths

must be divided by the number of devices on

the run (e.g., the maximum length is 225 feet

if two keypads are wired on a #22 gauge run).

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-21

RS-485 Bus Wire Run Limitations

The RS-485 bus from the first PLM to the last PLM

cannot exceed 4000 feet, using 16-AWG twisted cable.

The recommended form of wiring is to daisy chain the

connection from one unit to another. If several buildings

are to be connected, the RS-485 bus should form a

continuous path from one building to the next.

Avoid wiring units in a star configuration, where

multiple branches are formed. Star configurations

create loading and capacitance problems that are

complex, and become difficult to troubleshoot.

Mounting and Wiring the Panel Link Module

The PLM will not operate until the device is

enabled in the control’s

Device Programming

#93 Menu Mode

To mount and wire the Panel Link Module, refer to

Figure 3-28 and perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Remove all power from the control panel

before making any wiring connections.

2 Mount the module in the control cabinet if

space is available or, adjacent to the cabinet,

using 2-faced adhesive tape.

3 Set the PLM’s DIP switches for a device

address between 01 and 30. See the module’s

instructions for the DIP switch table.

Do not use an address being used by another

device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).

Step Action

4 Connect the 12V (+) and (–) and data-out and

data-in connections from the PLM to the

control’s keypads terminals (11, 12, 13 and

14), respectively.

5 Connect the 3-wire RS-485 cable between

each PLM. Recommended wiring is to bring

the wires “in” from one module (or control

panel) to terminals 5 (+), 6 (-), and 7 (G) and

“out” to the next module from terminals TB1-

8 (+), 9 (-), and 10 (G).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PLG-002-V0

RS-485

EOL

JUMPER

PINS

PIEZO

SOUNDER

TAMPER

REED

SWITCH

DIP

SWITCH

ECP IN

ECP OUT

Figure 3-28: VA8200 Panel Link Module Wiring

Long Range Radio Connected to the ECP

The control can support an ECP Long Range Radio

(LRR) (7820, 7835C, and 7845C are supported) that

connects to control panel’s keypad terminals. All

messages programmed for transmission via the phone

lines may also be sent via the LRR. These messages

are transmitted in Contact ID format regardless of the

format programmed for the control in fields 45 and 47.

We recommend that, if possible, you use

Contact ID for the main dialer. If Contact ID is

not used, certain types of reports are not sent.

Supervision

The data lines between the control and the LRR, as well

as certain functions in the radio, can be supervised.

If communication is lost or a trouble condition occurs,

both the LRR and the control’s dialer can be

programmed to send a Trouble message to the central

station.

NOTE: For complete information, see the Installation

Instructions that accompany the radio.

Operation

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP features Dynamic

Signaling Delay and Dynamic Signaling Priority

message reporting when Long Range Radio is used.

These message outputs are accessed through data fields

✱56 and ✱57, respectively. The Dynamic Signaling

feature is designed to reduce the number of redundant

reports sent to the central station.

The feature is described as follows:

Dynamic Signaling Delay (Field ✱56)

Select the time the panel should wait for

acknowledgment from the first reporting destination

before it attempts to send a message to the second

destination. Delays can be selected from 0 to 225

seconds, in 15-second increments.

Dynamic Signaling Priority (Field ✱57)

Select the initial reporting destination for messages,

Primary Dialer (0) or Long Range Radio (1).

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-22

The chart below provides an explanation of how the

Dynamic Signaling feature functions.

If Priority

(✱57) is… And message is… Then…

Acknowledged

before delay

expires

Message is removed

from queue and no

message is sent to

LRR.

Primary

Phone No.

("0")

Not acknowledged

before delay

expires

Message is sent to

both the Primary

Phone No. and LRR.

Acknowledged

before delay

expires

Message is removed

from queue and no

message is sent to

Primary Phone No.

Long

Range

Radio ("1")

Not acknowledged

before delay

expires

Message is sent to

both the Primary

Phone No. and LRR.

Additional LRR reporting options are defined by

selecting the events for each subscriber ID in fields 58

and 59. The reporting events are Alarms, Troubles,

Bypasses, Openings/Closing, System Events, and Test.

Also, within an enabled category, the specific event

must be enabled for dialer reporting. If, for instance,

zone 10 is enabled to report, but zone 11 is not, zone 10

will report via the LRR, but Zone 11 will not.

Messages arec transmitted from the VISTA-

128FBP/VISTA-250FBP to the LRR on a “first in/first

out” basis. If events occur at the same time, they are

transmitted in order of priority. The priority from most

to least important is : Fire Alarms, Panic Alarms,

Burglary Alarms, Fire Troubles, Non-Fire Troubles,

Bypasses, Openings/Closings, Test messages, and all

other types of reports.

There are two subscriber ID’s programmed into the

LRR: primary and secondary. These correspond to the

two subscriber ID’s programmed into the control for

each partition. If a subscriber ID for a partition is not

programmed (disabling reports to that central station),

the events enabled for the corresponding subscriber ID

in the LRR will not be transmitted.

If the event is to be reported to both phone numbers

(dual reporting), then reporting through the LRR will

be done in an alternating sequence. The first event in

the queue is transmitted to both the primary and the

secondary radio central stations before transmitting the

second event.

If split reporting is selected for the VISTA-

128FBP/VISTA-250FBP, then the LRR will send the

appropriate reports to the primary and secondary

central stations.

Installing the ECP Long Range Radio

To install the LRR, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Mount the radio according to the

instructions that accompany the radio.

2 Connect the data in/out terminals and

voltage input terminals of the radio to the

control’s keypad connection points,

terminals 11, 12, 13 and 14. See Figure 3-29.

RED

LONG

RANGE

RADIO

BLACK

GREEN

YELLOW

CONTROL

TERMINALS

LRR-001-V0

Figure 3-29: Wiring Long Range Radio to Keypad

Terminals

Trouble Messages

The following messages are displayed on the 6139/6160

when a problem exists on the Long Range Radio:

1. “LRR Battery”: The battery connected to the radio

is low.

2. “PLL out of Lock”: The radio has an internal fault

and cannot transmit any messages.

3. “Early Power Detect”: RF power is detected without

a valid transmission.

4. “Power Unattained”: Full RF power was never

attained.

5. “Frwd. Power Loss”: RF power was not sustained

throughout the transmission.

6. “Antenna Fault”: A problem with the antenna has

been detected.

7. “LRR CRC is bad”: The radio’s EEPROM is corrupt

(the internal CRC is bad).

NOTES:

Items 2 and 3 require factory service.

Items 4 and 5 could be the result of a bad or low

battery.

If the item 6 message appears, check the antenna,

connection and cable; if they are secure, factory service

is required.

All these messages are displayed in conjunction with

the “CHECK 8xx” message, which indicates a trouble

on the address to which the LRR unit is programmed in

the control.

All of these events except Antenna Fault are sent to the

event log and reported to the central station using

Contact ID Event Code 333 (expansion device trouble).

Antenna Fault uses Event Code 357. If the tamper is

tripped on the LRR, it uses Event Code 341 (expansion

device tamper).

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-23

Long Range Radio Connected to the J2 Triggers

These triggers may be used to trip auxiliary alarm

signaling equipment such as ADEMCO’s 7720,

7720ULF, and 7920SE Long Range Radios.

The triggers are common to all partitions and must be

enabled for each partition (field 2✳20).

If using the Alpha Pager Module, you cannot

use a Long Range Radio connected to the J2

triggers.

The fire and burglary/audible panic alarm triggers are

normally LOW and go HIGH until a User Code + OFF

is entered in all enabled partition(s) that display these

conditions.

The silent panic/duress trigger latches HIGH, except for

duress, which is momentary.

Refer to the installation instructions that accompany

your radio for the connections to the control panel.

Installing the Alpha Pager Module

The VA8201 Alpha Pager Module (APM) is used for the

transmission of alphanumeric messages to a user-

subscribed Paging Service. The APM will dial and can

be programmed to send the information to up to 8

different paging services. In addition, the module can

direct the reports to a parallel or serial printer.

NOTE: The APM is only required for alphanumeric

format. The system sends numeric format messages

directly.

ULThe Alpha Pager Module is not permitted in UL

installations.

The types of events (messages) the pager can transmit

are divided into 6 categories: alarms, troubles,

bypasses, openings/closings, system, and test.

The options for each paging service are:

• Paging service phone number

• Format (numeric, alphanumeric)

• Two Delay Times (numeric format only): the time

between dialing and transmitting of pager ID and

the time between pager ID and event information

• Pager ID number (if necessary)

• Partition(s) (which partitions the events are

transmitted for)

• Types of messages (events) sent). Must be

programmed for the pager to work.

The APM hangs up between each message. Multiple

messages are sent in the order received. If the APM

cannot make contact with the paging service, it retries

up to 10 times.

• When using the APM, field ✳14 must be

programmed for RS232 input (1).

• The APM transmits alphanumeric messages

using the TAP protocol. The installer must

check with the paging service to ensure that

they are using the TAP protocol Rev. 1.8 or

higher.

Paging Service Advisory

If you are setting up the software for the first time,

contact your paging service provider for the following

two pieces of information:

• The exact access number to be used with each

receiving device

• The correct PIN number for each receiving device.

Pager Formats

The system supports pager formats alphanumeric and

numeric.

Alphanumeric

PP Date Time EA ZZZ SSSS AD

Where:

PP Partition number (e.g., P1)

Date Date the event occurred (e.g., 03/15/00)

Time Time the event occurred (e.g., 01:16AM)

EA Event alpha descriptor (see APPENDIX D)

ZZZ Zone or user number ✳

SSSS The partition’s 4-digit subscriber number

(in field ✳32)

AD The zone’s programmable alpha descriptor

✳

✳ If the event is an arming or disarming, a 6-

character descriptor can be sent for the user, if

programmed, instead of the user number. The

descriptor can be programmed only via the

Compass Downloader.

The installer code has a default of INSTLR and

user number 002 has a default of MASTER for

the 6-character descriptor.

Numeric Format

SSSS P EEE ZZ, where:

SSSS The partition’s 4-digit subscriber number (field

✳32)

P Partition number

EEE 3-digit event code

ZZZ 3-digit zone or user number

NOTE: If any of the digits for the subscriber number

are hex digits (B, C, D, E, F), they will be replaced with

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, respectively, on the pager display.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-24

Numeric Format Event Codes

Event Code

Alarm 333

Trouble 555

Open 444

Close 777

Other 000

Mounting the Alpha Pager Module

The Alpha Pager Module (APM) may be mounted in the

control cabinet if space is available or, if this is not

possible, on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it.

Do not mount the Alpha Pager Module on the

cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC

board.

To mount the Alpha Pager Module, perform the

following steps:

Step Action

1If you are mounting the Alpha Pager Module

inside the control cabinet, attach it to the

cabinet’s interior surface with 2-faced

adhesive tape.

2If you are mounting the Alpha Pager Module

outside the cabinet, use the bracket

interface (Ademco Part Number K5350).

Wiring the Alpha Pager Module

The Alpha Pager Module connects via the 4142TR cable

to the J2 connector on the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-

250FBP.

• If using a serial printer, it must be configured

for a baud rate of 1200, seven data bits, even

parity, and one stop bit. (7/E/1).

• Automation software cannot be used if a serial

printer is used on the system.

To wire the Alpha Pager Module, refer to Figure 3-30

and perform the following steps:

Step Action

1Connect the 4142TR to J2 on the control.

2Connect the Red wire of 4142TR to the

Orange wire of the APM, and the Black wire

of the 4142TR to the Green wire of the APM.

4Connect the Red and Black wires of the APM

to terminals 11 and 12 (auxiliary power (+)

and (-), respectively) of the control.

5Connect the APM RJ11 connectors labeled

LINE and PHONE to RJ31X jacks as shown

in Figure 3-30.

6Connect the premises phones and the control

panel phone cord as shown in Figure 3-30.

7If you are using a parallel or serial printer,

connect the printer according to the

instructions accompanying the APM.

VA8201 ALPHA PAGER MODULE

PARALLEL PRINTER

PARALLEL

OUTPUT

SERIAL

OUTPUT

DATA/

POWER

TO PHONE

RJ11

HOME AUTOMATION COMPUTER

BROWN

GRAY

GREEN

BLACK

GREEN

620

PHONE CORD

APM-001-V0

TO LINE

RJ11

RJ31X

12 3

RING

TIP

INCOMING

PHONE LINE

PREMISES

PHONES

RING

TIP

RJ31X

123

ORANGE

RED

11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

COMMERCIAL FIRE/BURGLARY CONTROL PANEL

RED

BLACK

ORANGE

GREEN

RED

BLACK

ORANGE

RED

GREEN

SPLICE

RED

VIOLET

GRAY

BROWN

GRAY

BROWN

GREEN

RED

4142TR

Figure 3-30: Wiring the Alpha Pager Module

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-25

Access Control Using VistaKey

The VistaKey is a single-door access control module.

When connected to the alarm system, it provides access

control to the protected premises. The VISTA-128FBP

supports up to 8 VistaKey modules, the VISTA-250FBP

supports up to 15 modules (15 access points).

DO NOT USE BOTH the VistaKey and a

PassPoint Access Control System on the same

alarm panel.

ULThe VistaKey module contains three zones.

These zones should ONLY be used for access

control functions in UL installations. THESE

INPUT ZONES ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR

FIRE AND BURGLARY APPLICATIONS IN UL

INSTALLATIONS.

VistaKey Features

• Each VistaKey communicates with the VISTA-

128FBP/VISTA-250FBP via the V-Plex polling loop.

• If local power to the VistaKey is lost, the module

provides backup monitoring of the access point door

via a built-in V-Plex device that is powered solely

from the polling loop. The V-Plex device is

programmed in the control’s Zone Programming. A

serial number label is affixed to the VistaKey

module for manual entry of its serial number.

• The VistaKey supports up to 500 cardholders.

• All configurable options for each VistaKey are

accomplished via software, firmware, and

nonvolatile memory, except the access point zone

number (1-15), which is set via a user-friendly, 16-

position rotary switch.

• The addition and removal of VistaKey modules

from the system is easily accomplished via the

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP keypad.

• Each VistaKey provides one open-collector output

trigger (sink 12mA @ 12VDC).

Mounting and Wiring the VistaKey

For detailed instructions on how to install and

program the VistaKey, refer the

Installation and

Setup Guide

that accompanies the VistaKey-SK.

To mount and wire the VistaKey module, perform the

following steps:

Step Action

1 Mount the VistaKey, door strike or mag lock,

and card reader.

2 Mount the door status monitor (DSM) and/or

request-to-exit (RTE) devices.

3 Using

Figure 3-31 as a reference, connect the

card reader interface cable to TB3, making the

+5V or +12V connection last.

4 Connect the leads to TB1 in the following

order:

a. All ground leads to terminals 2, 5, and 9.

b. The DSM, (optional) RTE, and General

Purpose leads to terminals 6, 7, and 8,

respectively.

c. Door strike (or mag lock) lead to terminal

10.

d. Local +12V or +24V supply lead to terminal

e. Local +12V or +24V supply lead to the N/C

relay terminal 11 (if a mag lock is being

used), OR to the N/O relay terminal 10 (if a

door strike is being used).

5 Connect the (–) polling loop and (+) polling

loop leads (from the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-

250FBP) to terminals 4 and 3, respectively.

6 Set the Address Select switch to the desired

access door number (1-15).

7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each VistaKey

being installed.

Connecting the Card Reader

Lead from Reader Lead Color To VistaKey TB3

Terminal #

Green LED Orange 1

Ground* Black 2

DATA 1 (Clock) White 3

DATA 0 (Data) Green 4

+5VDC† Red† 6

+12VDC† Red† 7

*TB-3 Terminal 5 is also a ground and may be used instead of

terminal 2. Terminals 2 and 5 are a common ground.

†Connect to +5VDC OR +12VDC per reader manufacturer’s

specification.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-26

WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED

TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION

OF THIS SYSTEM.

POLE Door Strike/Mag Coil

DATA 1 (WHITE)

DATA 0 (GREEN)

NOTE 1: USE UL LISTED ENERGY CABLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS.

NOTE 2: VISTAKEY TB3 TERMINAL 5 IS A GROUND AND MAY BE

USED INSTEAD OF TB3 TERMINAL 2. TB3 TERMINALS 2 AND 5 ARE

A COMMON GROUND.

NOTE 3: WHEN USING TRIGGER TO TURN ON AN LED OR BUZZER,

RETURN HIGH SIDE OF LED OR BUZZER TO TB3 TERMINAL 7.

TRIGGER RATING IS 15mA AT 12VDC.

+5V

GND

TRIGGER (SEE NOTE 3)

+12V (RED)

ZONE C (General)

ZONE A (DSM)

ZONE B (RTE)

POLLING LOOP -

14V MAX (12V @ 85-160mA Nominal)

POLLING LOOP +

GND

N/O DOOR STRIKE POWER

N/C MAG COIL POWER

111223456789101RELAY CONTACT RATINGS:

3A @ 28VDC MAX. (RESISTIVE LOAD)

TB 1

TB 3

READER INTERFACE CABLE

GND (BLACK)

RDR LED (ORANGE)

TO ALARM SYSTEM

CONTROL PANEL

POLLING LOOP TERMINALS.

CONNECTION

VISTAKEY

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 CLASS A

LIMITS OF FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT

TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:

(1) IT MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE.

(2) IT MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT

MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.

DOOR

CONTROL

RELAY

FOR ADDITIONAL RATINGS AND

SPECIFICATIONS, REFER TO

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION

FOR THE VISTAKEY-SK.

THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE

PROTECTION ASSOCIATION'S STANDARDS 70 &

74 (NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOC.,

BATTERYMARCH PARK, QUINCY, MA. 02269).

PRINTED INFORMATION DESCRIBING PROPER

MAINTENANCE, EVACUATION PLANNING AND

REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE PROVIDED WITH

THIS EQUIPMENT.

TO TB1, 11 OR 12

+ 12 VDC TO ONLY

ONE OF THESE INPUTS.

(FROM TB1-1)

Figure 3-31: Wiring the VistaKey

Access Control Using the PassPoint Access Control System

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP interfaces with the

PassPoint ACS via the VISTA Gateway Module (VGM).

The VGM is connected between the ECP bus (keypad

terminals) of the control and the network bus of the

PassPoint ACS.

The control sends the VGM its status information,

event log entries, and entry/exit requests (inputs

programmed with response type Access Point) from

keypads, hardwired zones, and RF transmitters. The

VGM then reformats and retransmits this information

to the Main Logic Board, (MLB) on the PassPoint ACS

network bus.

ULInterfacing the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP

with the PassPoint Access Control System via

the VISTA Gateway Module is not permissible

for UL installations.

Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module

The VISTA Gateway Module is connected between the

ECP bus (VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP keypad

terminals) and the network bus of the PassPoint Access

Control System. See Figure 3-32 for the proper wiring

connections.

}

ECHELON NETWORK

(PASSPOINT ACS)

YELLOW

RED

BLACK

PROM C

TRANSFORMER

4-PIN

KEYPAD

PLUG

}

CONTROL’S

KEYPAD

TERMINALS

GREEN

Figure 3-32: Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-27

Event Log Connections

This system has the ability to record up to 1000 events

of various categories in the Event Log (history log).

Each event is recorded with the time and date of its

occurrence (if real-time clock is set).

The categories are Alarm, Supervisory/Check, Bypass,

Open/Close, System and Test conditions. The log may

be viewed on an alpha keypad, the AUI or printed on a

serial printer.

• When using a printer, field 3*19 must be

programmed for RS232 input (1).

• If you are using a serial printer, J2 pins 5 &

9 on the control panel cannot be used to

interface with Automation software

Using the Alpha Pager Module (APM)

To connect a printer using the Alpha Pager Module,

perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Connect the APM to the control (see

Installing the Alpha Pager Module previously

in this section).

2 Connect the printer according to the

instructions that accompany the APM.

Using the 4100SM

To connect a serial printer using the 4100SM, refer to

Figure 3-33 and perform the following steps:

Step Action

1Connect the 4142TR cable to J2 on the

control.

2Connect the Violet and Red wires of the

4142TR to terminal 1 and 6 on the 4100SM,

respectively.

3Connect terminals 8 and 7 of the 4100SM to

terminals 11 and 12 (aux. power (+) and (-)),

respectively of the control.

4Connect the serial printer to the 4100SM.

NOTE: The 4100SM Module is supplied with

a 10-foot RS232 cable. A longer cable can be

used if the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP is

separated from the serial printer by more

than 10 feet, but the total cable length should

be less than 50 feet.

NOTES:

If you are using printer, field 3✳19 must = 1.

If you are using a serial printer, it must configured with

7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit, 1200 baud

123456789

J2 CONNECTOR

VIOLET

GREY

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

GREEN

BROWN

BLUE

BLACK

4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)

4100SM SERIAL MODULE

+ PWR

- (GND)

RXD

not used

TXD

not used

DTR

BLUE WHITE

To TB11 Aux. Power (+)

(25mA current draw)

To TB12 Aux. Power (-)

USE GENDER CHANGER

SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM

IF PRINTER HAS DB25

MALE CONNECTOR

Cable

Supplied with

4100SM

SERIAL PRINTER

SET FOR: 8 DATA BITS

EVEN PARITY

STOP BIT

300/1200 BAUD

4100SM JUMPERS

(CUT TO SET RESPECTIVE SIGNAL FLOATING)

COLOR FUNCTION PIN #

RED

BLUE

WHITE

CTS

DSR

RED

4100SM-012-V0

Figure 3-33: Printer Connections to the 4100SM

NOTE: See the 4100SM Installation Instructions for

details concerning the serial printer operation.

Installing the 4285/4286 VIP Module

The 4285/4286 VIP Module is an add-on accessory that

permits the user to access the security system (and

relays) via a TouchTone telephone. This may be done

either from the premises or by calling the premises

from a remote location. Only one VIP Module can be

used in a security system. This module must be

enabled as Device Address 4 in the Device

Programming in #93 Menu Mode, and must be assigned

to a partition.

ULThe 4285/4286 VIP Module is not permitted in

UL installations.

Detailed operating instructions for phone access

to the security system are provided with the VIP

Module.

The 4285/4286 VIP Module features:

• Allows the user to receive synthesized voice

messages over the phone regarding the status of

the security system.

• Allows the user to arm and disarm the security

system and perform most other commands using

the telephone keypad.

• Allows the user to control relays using the

telephone keypad.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-28

• Provides voice annunciation over the phone to

confirm any command that is entered.

• Announces many of the same words that would

normally be displayed on an alpha keypad under

the same system conditions. Refer to the words in

bold on the Alpha Vocabulary list found in the #93

Menu Mode Programming in the Programming

Guide.

• Can be supervised for connection to control panel

(annunciated and reported as Zone 804).

The 4285/4286 is wired between the control panel and

the premises’ handset(s) (see Figure 3-34). It listens for

TouchTones on the phone line and reports them to the

control panel. During on-premises phone access, it

powers the premises phones; during off-premises phone

access, it seizes the line from the premises phones and

any answering machines.

• The VIP module will not operate until the

device address (04) is enabled in the control’s

Device Programming

#93 Menu Mode

• Do not mount the VIP Module on the cabinet

door or attempt to attach it to the PC board.

To install the VIP module, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Mount the module in the control cabinet if

space is available or, if this is not possible, on

the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it.

If you mount the VIP Module inside the

control cabinet, attach it to the cabinet’s

interior surface with 2-faced adhesive tape.

You may leave the module’s cover off if it is

mounted within the cabinet.

If you mount the module outside the

cabinet, use the screw holes at the rear to

mount horizontally or vertically (2-faced

adhesive tape may be used, if preferred).

2 Affix the 4285/4286 connections label

(supplied separately) to the inside of the VIP

Module’s cover, if the cover is used.

Otherwise, affix the label to the inside of the

control cabinet’s door.

3 Make 12V (+) and (–) and data-in and data-

out connections from the VIP Module to the

control, using the connector cable supplied

with the VIP Module. These are the same

connections as for remote keypads.

Step Action

Connect the module to the phone line as

shown below. See Figure 3-34.

4285/4286 Terminal Connects to:

1. Phone In (Tip) green wire of direct-

connect cord

2. Phone In (Ring) red wire of direct-

connect cord

3. Phone Out (Tip) brown wire of direct-

connect cord

4. Phone Out (Ring) gray wire of direct-

connect cord

5. No Connection

6. Audio Out 1∗Speaker

7. Audio Out 1∗Speaker

∗Supported by the 4286 only

Use an RJ31X Jack with the phone cable

supplied with the control to make connections

to the VIP module. Make connections exactly

as shown in Figure 3-34.This is essential,

even if the system is not connected to a

central station. The 4285/4286 will not

function if this is not done.

• If touch-tones are not present following phone

access to the security system

via an on-

premises phone

, try reversing the pair of

wires connected to terminals 3 and 4 on the

4285/4286.

• If the phone plug is disconnected from the

control, the premise’s phones will not operate.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-27

ANSWERING

MACHINE

4286 VIP MODULE

1234 56 7

PREMISES

ANSWERING

MACHINE AND

PHONES

RJ31X

JACK

INCOMING TELCO LINE

GRAY

BROWN

GREEN

RED

CONTROL PANEL

JACK

RED

MAIN

DIALER

JACK

RJ31X

JACK

CALLER

ID UNIT

DIRECT

CONNECT

CORD

8-CONDUCTOR

DOUBLE PLUG CORD

(SUPPLIED)

GRAY

BROWN

GREEN

4286_wiring-003-V0

YELLOW

NO CONNECTION

RED

BLACK

GREEN

TO CONTROL PANEL

KEYPAD CONNECTIONS

KEYED

HEADER

NO CONNECTION

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR EXISTING INSTALLATIONS:

EXISTING WIRES CONNECTED TO THE "HANDSET"

TERMINALS ON CONTROL MUST BE MOVED FROM

THERE TO TERMINALS 3 AND 4 ON THE 4286.

U.S. PATENT NO. 4791658

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES, PART 68

FCC REGISTRATION NO. AC3USA-74659-KX-N

RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 1.0B

4500

THERMOSTAT

GREEN

YELLOW

NOTE:

4286 DEVICE

ADDRESS IS

SET TO "4".

SEE SPEAKER NOTE

SPEAKER NOTE:

SPEAKER

VOLUME

CONTROL

IF CONNECTING SINGLE SPEAKER, USE 8-ohm

SPEAKER ONLY.

IF CONNECTING 2 SPEAKERS, USE 4-ohm OR

8-ohm SPEAKERS AND CONNECT IN SERIES.

Figure 3-34: 4285/4286 VIP Module Connections

Installing the Audio Alarm Verification Module

ULAudio Alarm Verification (AAV) is not permitted

in UL installations.

• 685 Receiver software must be rev. 4.6 or

higher. Earlier versions will not hold the

phone line connection.

• Contact ID code for “Listen-in to Follow” is

606. Contact ID is the only reporting format

that will send a “Listen-in to Follow.”

NOTES:

• When the AAV indicates that the audio alarm

verification session is completed, all keypad sounds

are restored. Sirens are restored if the alarm

timeout period has not expired.

• As part of its fail-safe software, the control limits

all audio alarm verification sessions to 15 minutes.

This is because once the session begins, the AAV

Module controls the duration.

• If a new Fire alarm should occur during a session,

the control breaks the phone connection and sends

the new Fire Alarm report, then re-triggers the

AAV Mode. All other dialer messages triggered

during ongoing conversation are held until either

the AAV Module signals that it is inactive, or the

15-minute timeout occurs.

If the phone plug is disconnected from the

control, the premise’s phones will not operate.

To install the Eagle 1250 AAV module to the control,

perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Mount the module in the control cabinet if

space is available or, if this is not possible,

on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it.

2 Connect the Eagle 1250 Module terminals 7

and 8 to the control’s zone 5 terminals 22

and 23.

The purpose of this connection is to silence

and restore the sounders at the premises. It

is also used to postpone noncritical dialer

reports while the AAV session is in progress.

3Program zone 5 with a response type (e.g.,

10 Interior w/Delay). Field 1✴60 must be

enabled to silence sounders on the premises.

Zone 5 is no longer available as a protection

zone.

4 Connect the AAV module’s falling-edge

trigger input (terminal 5 on Eagle model

1250) to a 4204 relay module, as shown in

Figure 3-35.

Program the start and stop system operation

as 60 for the 4204 relay, in Output

Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-30

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

▲

MODEL EAGLE SECURITY

1241

REFER TO

AAV MODULE

INSTRUCTIONS

FOR CONNECTIONS

TO AUDIO SPEAKERS

AND MICROPHONE

PREMISES ANSWERING

MACHINE AND PHONES

INCOMING TELCO LINE

V+

GND

1 2 3

RELAY 1

(SHOWN OFF)

NO NC C

4204 RELAY MODULE

RED

GREEN

GRAY

BROWN

ZONE 5+

ZONE 5-

CONTROL

GND

8-CONDUCTOR

DOUBLE PLUG

CORD

(SUPPLIED)

RJ31X

JACK

BROWN

GRAY

CALLER

ID UNIT

ANSWERING

MACHINE

CONTROL

PANEL

ALL SWITCHES OFF

EXCEPT SWITCH 5

(WHICH SHOULD BE ON)

NOTE

REMOVE ANY EOL RESISTOR

FROM CONTROL PANEL

TERMINALS 22 AND 23.

aav_conn-005-V0

Figure 3-35: AAV Connections

Connecting the Transformer

Use the 1451 Transformer with enclosure (supplied)

with the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP control when

the PS24 Power Supply will not be used. This

transformer provides 18VAC/72VA secondary winding

for powering the control.

Use the 1451-24 Transformer when using both the

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP and the PS24 Power

Supply. This transformer provides 18VAC/72VA

secondary winding to power the control and

30VAC/188VA secondary winding to power the PS24

Power Supply.

The control panel kit you purchased comes with the

appropriate transformer. Both transformers have a

manually resettable circuit breaker mounted inside a

protective metal enclosure.

Use the following instructions for mounting and wiring

the 18VAC secondary winding of either transformer.

Use the instructions provided with the PS24 Power

Supply Module to wire the 30VAC winding of the 1451-

24 Transformer.

To connect the 1451transformer to the control, perform

the following steps:

Step Action

1 Remove the front cover of the enclosure.

2 Mount the enclosure to the wall near the

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP control

panel. The enclosure has 4 mounting holes

on its back surface for this purpose.

3 Run 120VAC wiring to the enclosure in

conduit. A dedicated circuit must be

used.

Step Action

4 Use wire nuts to splice the 120VAC wires to

the transformer’s white and black primary

leads.

5 Connect the earth ground post on the back of

the enclosure to a good earth ground.

6 Run 16AWG wire in conduit from the

enclosure to the control panel.

7 Use wire nuts to splice the transformer blue

18VAC secondary leads to the 16AWG wire.

Connect the 16AWG wire at the control

panel to terminals 1 and 2.

8 Replace the front cover of the enclosure and

fasten it with the screws supplied

• Use wires having insulation rated for at least

90°C operation and suitable for non-power

limited applications.

• Use care to keep 18VAC wiring separated

from all other wiring inside the control panel’s

enclosure. This must be done by running

non-power-limited 18VAC wiring into the

control panel’s enclosure via one of the

knockouts on the left-hand side, and then tie-

wrapping these wires to the tie-wrap loops

located near the knockout.

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-31

Earth Ground Connections

In order for the lightning transient protective devices in

this product to be effective, the designated earth ground

terminal (terminal 30) must be terminated in a good

earth ground. Recommended wire gauge for the ground

connection is #16 AWG, run no farther than 30 feet.

The panel requires the earth ground connection

for its lightning transient protection devices.

To connect the earth ground, perform the following

steps:

Step Action

1 Connect the earth ground post inside the

1451 enclosure to a good earth ground (use

grounding methods specified in the National

Electric Code).

2 Use a green nut (supplied) to secure the wire

to the ground post. The ground wire should

be the only wire under this nut.

3 Run a 16AWG wire from the ground post to

the panel’s earth ground terminal (30). Use

a second green nut (supplied) to secure this

wire to the ground post.

This connection avoids ground loops that

may occur when the 1451 and panel are

connected to different earth ground systems.

Determining the Control’s Power Supply Load

In the event of an AC power loss the VISTA-

128FBP/VISTA-250FBP and the PS24 Power Supply

Module must be supported by backup, rechargeable

batteries. When the system is used without the PS24,

a 12VDC, 12AH to 34.4AH battery must be connected

the control panel. When the system is used with a

PS24, two 12VDC, 7AH to 17.2AH batteries must be

connected to the PS24.

The PS24 configures these batteries to provide 24V

backup power to its outputs and 12V backup power to

the control panel.

The battery’s capacity must be sized to provide 24 hours

(UL central station fire) or 60 hours (UL remote station

fire) of standby time followed by 5 minutes (fire only) or

15 minutes (fire and burglary) alarm time.

Use the worksheets that follow to calculate the total

current for Auxiliary Power 1, Auxiliary Power 2, Bell

1, Bell 2, Polling Loop and the total current load of the

control panel. In each worksheet, multiply each device’s

standby and/or alarm current by the number of units

used.

Then, if you are using the PS24, fill out the Total

PS24 Module Load Worksheet, found in the PS24’s

instructions, to determine the required capacity of the

backup batteries that must be connected to the PS24.

Select two batteries from the Battery Selection Table in

the PS24’s instructions that have a capacity greater

than or equal to the calculated capacity.

If you are NOT using the PS24, fill out the Battery

Capacity Calculation Worksheet, following the other

worksheets below, to determine the required capacity

for the backup battery. Select a battery from the

Battery Selection Table (found later in this section) that

have a capacity greater than or equal to the calculated

capacity.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-32

1. In Worksheet 1, enter devices used on the polling

loop. Calculate total current draw on the polling

loop.

Worksheet 1: Total Polling Loop Current Draw

Polling Loop Device Current # of Units Total

Polling Loop Subtotal

(terminals 28 & 29 – 128mA) ✳

✳The total current cannot exceed 128mA. If total load exceeds

128mA, then a 4297 Loop Extender Module can be used. This

module is powered from the panel’s auxiliary power, and

provides a separate polling loop output, which can support an

additional 128mA load. Note that the total number of points

connected to the panel cannot exceed 119.

2. In Worksheet 2, enter devices used on Auxiliary

Power 1. Calculate standby and alarm currents,

then add to get Auxiliary Power 1 current subtotal.

Worksheet 2: Auxiliary Power 1 Current Load

Total Current

Device

Model # Device Current X

# of Units Standby Alarm

Auxiliary Power 1 Subtotal

(terminals 10 & 11) 1A max.1.7A max.

3. In Worksheet 3, enter devices used on Auxiliary

Power 2. Calculate standby and alarm currents,

then add to get Auxiliary Power 2 current subtotal.

Worksheet 3: Auxiliary Power 2 Current Load

Total Current

Device

Model # Device Current X

# of Units Standby Alarm

Auxiliary Power 2 Subtotal

(pin 5 on keypad port 2) 400mA max.1.7A max.

4. In Worksheet 4, enter devices connected to the Bell

1 Output. Calculate alarm currents, then add to get

the Bell 1 Output current subtotal.

Worksheet 4: Bell 1 Output Current Load

Total Current

Device

Model # Device Current X

# of Units Standby Alarm

XXXXXX

Bell 1 Output Subtotal

(terminals 3 & 4 – 1.7A max.)

Section 3 - Installing the Control

3-33

5. In Worksheet 5, enter devices connected to the Bell

2 Output. Calculate alarm currents, then add to get

the Bell 2 Output current subtotal.

Worksheet 5: Bell 2 Output Current Load

Total Current

Device

Model # Device Current X

# of Units Standby Alarm

XXXXXX

Bell 2 Output Subtotal

(terminals 5 & 6 – 1.7A max.)

6. In Worksheet 6, enter the total calculated subtotals

of all listed outputs from Worksheets 1 through 5,

then add to get the combined current.

Worksheet 6: Total VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP

Current Load

Total Current

Standby Alarm

Polling Loop Subtotal

Auxiliary Power 1 Subtotal

Auxiliary Power 2 Subtotal

Bell 1 Output Subtotal

Bell 2 Output Subtotal

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP

PCB Current (Incl. 2-wire smoke

detector loading on zones 1 & 2) 300mA 470mA

5140DLM Backup Dialer Module 5mA

(inactive) 15mA

(active)

Total Current Load

(1A max. standby; 2.3A max. alarm)

NOTE: The 5140DLM actually draws 55mA when active.

However, since the control panel PCB current includes the

main dialer current, and since the main dialer is inactive when

the 5140DLM is active, the 5140DLM imposes only a 15mA

added load on the current supply.

• If you are not using the PS24, the total control standby load must be limited to 1.27A for 24-hour standby

time, or to 510mA for 60-hour standby time using a 12V, 34.4AH battery connected to the control.

• If you are using the PS24, skip the Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet that follows and fill out the

worksheets found the PS24”s instructions instead. The total control panel standby load must be limited to

919mA for 24-hour standby time or 345mA for 60-hour standby time using two 12V, 17.2AH batteries

connected the PS24.

Determining the Size of the Standby Battery

For burglary installations requiring 4-hour standby

time followed by 15-minutes alarm time, use a 12AH

battery to support all loads up to and including the

maximum system load (e.g., 1.3A standby/2.8A alarm

total control panel load). For fire installations requiring

24-hour or 60-hour standby time, use the worksheet

below to calculate the required battery capacity.

DO NOT use Gates batteries (sealed lead-acid

type). These batteries require a different

charging voltage than is supplied by the panel.

Use Worksheet 7 to determine the required backup

battery capacity and use The Battery Selection Table to

determine the battery model number. A dual battery

harness is supplied that allows two batteries to be

wired in parallel for increased capacity.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

3-34

7. Using the total calculated from Worksheet 6,

calculate the battery capacity required for the

installation.

Worksheet 7: Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet

Capacity Formula Calculated

Value

Standby

Capacity

Total standby current X 24 or 60

hours X 1.1 contingency factor.

Alarm

Capacity Total alarm curr. X 0.083 (5 min)

or X 0.250 (15 min)

Total

Capacity Add standby and alarm

capacities

8. Use the Battery Selection Table to select the

appropriate battery for the installation.

Battery Selection Table

Capacity Recommended Battery Comment

4AH Yuasa NP4-12

7AH Yuasa NP7-12

12AH Yuasa NP12-12 Fits in large

mercantile

cabinet only.

14AH Yuasa NP7-12 Connect two

in parallel.

17.2AH Yuasa NPG18-12 Fits in large

mercantile

cabinet only.

9. Connect the battery, referring to Figure 3-36.

The standby battery is automatically tested for

10 minutes every 4 hours, beginning 4 hours

after exiting Programming mode. In addition,

entry into the Test mode initiates a battery test.

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP also runs

a 5-second battery test every 60 seconds to

check if the battery is connected.

BLACK

RED

BLACK

RED

12V

BATTERY

12V

BATTERY

(IF REQUIRED)

BATTERY TABS

MAIN PCB

DUAL

BATTERY

HARNESS

(2 PAIRS

SUPPLIED)

OBSERVE POPARITY!

+ RED

BLK

USE THE 2nd PAIR OF BATTERY

TABS AND THE 2nd PAIR OF

BATTERY HARNESSES (NOT

SUPPLIED) TO CONNECT ONE

OR TWO ADDITIONAL BATTERIES

IN PARALLEL.

NOTE: WHEN CONNECTING BATTERIES IN PARALLEL:

- USE BATTERIES FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER AND

WITH THE SAME VOLTAGE AND CAPACITY RATING.

- USE BATTERIES WITH APPROXIMATELY SAME AGE AND

STATE OF CHARGE.

- USE CABLES PROVIDED AND OBSERVE POLARITY!

- IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT ALL BATTERIES BE REPLACED

AT SAME TIME, EVEN IF ONLY ONE BATTERY HAS BECOME

WEAK.

- AS LONG AS ONE GOOD BATTERY REMAINS CONNECTED,

THE ONCE PER 60 SECOND BATTERY TEST WILL NOT

DETECT THE DISCONNECTION OF REMAINING BATTERIES.

batt_conn-001-V0

Figure 3-36: Connecting the Backup Batteries

4-1

SECTION 4

Programming

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,

and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250FBP’s features. See SECTION 1: General Description for the

table listing the differences between the VISTA-128FBP and the VISTA-250FBP control panels.

Program Modes

There are two programming modes for the VISTA-

128FBP/VISTA-250FBP. These are the Data Field

Program Mode and the #93 Menu Mode. The Data Field

Program Mode is where many system options are

programmed. The #93 Menu Mode is an interactive

mode that require a 2-line alpha keypad (6139/6160).

The factory-loaded defaults (✳97) enable

keypad addresses 00-01 only. A keypad set to

one of these addresses must be used to

program the system initially.

Local keypad programming can be disabled

through Compass downloading software. If this

is done, Program mode can only be accessed

via the downloading software.

Entering and Exiting Programming Mode

Enter Programming mode using either method a or b:

a. Press both the [✳] and [#] keys at the same time

within 30 seconds after power is applied to the

control.

b. Enter the

Installer Code + [8] + [0] + [0] + [0]

keys. The factory installer code can be changed

once in the Program mode (field ✳00).

NOTE: The default for the Installer Code is 5140.

Exit the Programming mode by either method a or b:

a. Press [✳] + [9] + [8]. Exiting by this method

prevents the installer code from being used to re-

enter Programming mode. Only method “a” can be

used to re-enter Programming mode.

b. Press [✳] + [9] + [9]. Exiting by this method

permits the installer code to be being used to re-

enter Programming mode.

Data Field Programming Mode

In the Data Field Program Mode you may access any

field simply by entering either [✳] or [#] + the field

number:

• To write or change information in a field press [✳]

+ the field number (✳03).

• To read the information in a field press [#] + the

field number (#03).

When the entries for a field are completed, the keypad

beeps three times and advances to the next field.

SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING

COMMANDS

✳91 Select partition for programming partition-specific fields

✳92 Display the software revision level of the control panel

✳93 Enter Menu mode programming

✳94 Go to next page of fields

✳99 Go back to previous page of fields or exit Programming

Mode with no installer code lockout

✳98 Exit Programming Mode with Installer Code lockout

Moving from One Page of Programming to Another

The data fields are grouped into three levels (referred to

as “pages”). The first page is accessed as soon as

Programming Mode is entered.

The second and third pages of data fields are indicated

at the keypad by a 1 and 2, respectively, in front of the

2-digit field address. “ALT PROGRAM MODE” is

displayed along with a “100”, “200” or “300,” indicating

which page of program fields is accessed.

To access the next level of programming fields:

1 Press

✳94.

2 Press [✳] + [XX], where XX = the last two digits of

the program field, and make the desired entry.

NOTES:

Press ✳94 to move to 2nd page, (fields 1✳01 - 1✳76);

press ✳99 to move back to 1st page.

Press ✳94 to move to 3rd page (fields 2✳00 - 2✳88);

press ✳99 to move back to 2nd page.

Press ✳94 to move to 4th page, (fields 3✳00 - 3✳85);

press ✳99 to move back to 3rd page.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

4-2

Entry Errors

• If an address is improperly entered, the keypad

displays “FC.”

• If a program entry is improperly entered (for

example, a larger number than is permitted), the

keypad display will go blank.

In either of the above cases, simply re-enter [✳] + the

correct field number and then enter the correct data.

Programming System-Wide Data Fields

Values for some programming fields are system-wide

(global), and some can be different for each partition

(partition-specific).

The partition-specific programming fields are

automatically skipped when programming the

global fields. If the system has only 1 partition,

the partition-specific fields

are not

automatically

skipped.

To program system-wide data fields, perform the

following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter Program Mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0 0.

The following display appears:

Program Mode

✳Fill # View – 00

2 If the control has not been programmed before,

enter ✳97 to load factory defaults.

3Press [✳] and enter the first field number to be

programmed (for example, ✳00, Installers

Code). Make the desired entry. When the field

is complete, the keypad beeps three times and

advances to the next field. If you do not want to

change the next field, press [✳] and enter the

next field number to be programmed.

First Page of fields

(✳00 - ✳90)

To move to the next page of fields, press ✳94.

To return to the previous page, press ✳99.

4Press ✳99 or ✳98 to exit Program Mode.

NOTE: If the number of digits that you enter in a data

field is fewer than the maximum permitted (for

example, a phone number), the keypad displays the last

entry and waits. To proceed, enter [✳] + the next data

field you wish to program.

Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields

To program partition-specific data fields once in

Program Mode, do the following:

Step Action

1 Enter Program Mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0

2Press ✳91, which will prompt you for the

partition number desired.

3 Enter a partition-specific field number (e.g.,

✳09) to begin programming.

When the first field’s entry is completed, the

next partition-specific field is automatically

displayed. When all partition-specific fields

are programmed, the system returns to the

global programming fields (page 1 fields).

4 Repeat this procedure for each partition in

the installation.

NOTE: To return to the global program fields before

finishing all fields, enter any global field number.

Programming Partition-Specific Fields

Press ✳91 to select a partition.

↓

Enter the partition to be programmed.

↓

Enter a partition-specific field number and make entry.

↓

After partition-specific fields are programmed,

press ✳91 to select next partition.

Enter any global field number to return to the global

fields at any time.

#93 Menu Mode Programming

The #93 Menu Mode is an interactive mode through

which much of the system’s programming is done. In

this mode, there are “question and answer” prompts

that can be accessed once Data Field Program Mode has

been entered. These prompts require a 2-line alpha

keypad (6139/6160).

After programming all system-related programming

fields in the usual way, press #93 while still in

programming mode to display the first choice of the

menu-driven programming functions. Press 0 (NO) or 1

(YES) in response to the displayed menu selection.

Pressing 0 will display the next choice in sequence.

Section 4 – Programming

4-3

Below are the main menu selections. For details refer to the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Programming Guide.

MAIN MENU OPTIONS

ZONE PROG?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For programming the following:

• Zone Number

• Zone Response Type

• Partition Number for Zone

• Dialer report code for zone

• Input Device Type for zone (whether RF, polling loop, etc.)

• Enrolling serial numbers of 5800 Series transmitters & serial polling loop devices into the system.

• Zone Attributes (e.g., Arm w/Fault, Silent, etc.).

EXPERT MODE?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Same as Zone Programming except:

• Done with a minimum number of keystrokes.

• Can program wireless keys using pre-defined templates.

NOTE: All the zone attributes cannot be programmed using the Expert Mode.

REPORT CODE PROG?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For programming the following:

• Alarm report codes for zones

• Restore and supervisory codes

• All other system report codes

ALPHA PROG?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For entering alpha descriptors for the following:

• Zone Descriptors

• Installer’s Message

• Custom Words

• Partition Descriptors

• Relay Descriptors

DEVICE PROG?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For defining the following device characteristics for addressable devices, including keypads, RF receivers

(5881), output relay modules (4204/4204CF), FSA (FSA-8/FSA-24), 4285/4286 VIP Module, Panel Link

Module (VA8201), ECP long range radio (7845C), and VISTA Gateway Module:

• Device Address

• Device Type

• Keypad Options (including Partition assignment)

• RF House ID

• LRR Options (including Programming radio)

OUTPUT PGM?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For defining output device functions.

RLY VOICE DESCR?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For entering voice descriptors for relays to be used with the 4285/4286 VIP Module.

CUSTOM INDEX ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For creating custom word substitutes for VIP Module annunciation.

ACCESS POINT PGM

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For defining the parameters for each of the VistaKey zones, including which group(s) have access through

an access point (door). See the

VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide

for detailed programming

instructions.

ACCESS GRP PGM

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For defining the capabilities (privileges) for each group of users. See the

VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup

Guide

for detailed programming instructions.

EVENT/ACTION PGM

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For defining events and time windows for an access group. See the

VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup

Guide

for detailed programming instructions.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

4-4

MAIN MENU OPTIONS

SCHEDULED CHK-IN

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

For defining the schedule for the system to automatically call the downloader.

Following is a list of commands used while in the Menu Mode:

#93 Menu Mode Programming Commands

#93 Enters Menu Mode.

[✳]Serves as [ENTER] key. Press to have keypad accept entry.

[#] Backs up to previous screen.

0Press to answer NO.

1Press to answer YES.

00, or 000+[✳]Quits Menu Mode and goes back to Data Field Programming Mode, if entered at first prompt of each main menu option.

Zone Number Designations

The VISTA-128FBP supports up to 128 zones, the

VISTA-250FBP supports up to 250 zones, of hardwire,

polling loop and/or wireless protection, distributed

among up to 8 partitions. The following table lists the

zone numbers and the types of sensors that can be used

with each, and some alternate functions of the zones.

Zone Function

1 & 2 2-wire Smoke Detectors (if used)

5 Audio Alarm Verification (if used)

6 Cabinet Tamper/Ground Fault (if used)

7 Keyswitch (if used)

8 Latching-Type Glassbreak Detectors (if used)

1-8 Traditional Hardwired Zones

1-250 5800 Series Wireless Devices

9-250 Polling Loop Devices

995 ✳ + 1 Panic

996 # + 3 Panic

999 ✳ + # Panic

Zone Defaults

Zone # Zone Type Zone # Zone Type

001 09 800-830 00

002 03 970 00

003 03 971-974 19

004** 04 975 00

005 03 988 & 990 00

006 03 992* N/A

007 03 995 00

008 03 996 00

010–250 00 997 19

601-632 00 999 06

NOTES:

*Zone 992 is the Duress zone. Programming of the zone

response type is not applicable. This zone requires only the

report code programming.

** Zone 004 is also defaulted with Auto-STAY enabled.

Zone Index

The zones are designated as follows:

ZONE #

RANGE ZONE

FUNCTION ACTUAL ZONE

001 – 250 Protection

zones As indicated

601 – 632 Relay

Supervisory

Zones

6 + 2-digit Relay Number; e.g.,

Relay Number 03, if supervised,

is zone 603.

NOTE: Relay supervision

should be used only for

relays on 4204CF modules.

800 – 830 ECP Device

Supervisory

Zones

8 + 2-digit Device Address;

e.g., Device Address 01, if

supervised, is zone 801.

4285/4286 VIP Module is zone

804 (because its Device

Address must be set to 4).

970-977,

988, 990, &

997

System

Supervisory

Zones

970: Bell 1Output

971 Bell 2 Output

972 Earth Ground

973 J2 Input 1 (LRR)

974 Dialer 1

975 Dialer 2

976 Auxiliary Relay

977 J2 LRR Trigger Outputs

988: 2nd Wireless Receiver –

not receiving signals

990: 1st Wireless Receiver –

not receiving signals

997: Polling Loop (short

circuit)

992, 995 –

999 Duress and

Keypad Panics 992: Duress

995: 1 + ✳ panic (A key)

996: 3 + # panic (C key)

999: ✳ + # panic (B key)

Supervisory zones should be given a response type of either 05

(Trouble by Day, Alarm by Night) or 19 (24-Hour Trouble).

Section 4 – Programming

4-5

Communication Defaults

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT [1] ADEMCO Contact ID

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Prim) [0] ADEMCO Low Speed

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT [1] ADEMCO Contact ID

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.) [0] ADEMCO Low Speed

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION [0] [0]

No checksum Primary Secondary

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SEL. [0] Radionics

*51 DUAL REPORTING [0] no

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY

[0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY

[0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

Communication Defaults for Zones

ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd

101 00 54 09 00 107 02 00 160 10 00

202 00 55 10 00 108 03 00 161 11 00

303 00 56 11 00 109 04 00 162 12 00

404 00 57 12 00 110 05 00 163 13 00

505 00 58 13 00 111 06 00 164 14 00

606 00 59 14 00 112 07 00 165 15 00

707 00 60 15 00 113 08 00 166 01 00

808 00 61 01 00 114 09 00 167 02 00

909 00 62 02 00 115 10 00 168 03 00

10 10 00 63 03 00 116 11 00 169 04 00

11 11 00 64 04 00 117 12 00 170 05 00

12 12 00 65 05 00 118 13 00 171 06 00

13 13 00 66 06 00 119 14 00 172 07 00

14 14 00 67 07 00 120 15 00 173 08 00

15 15 00 68 08 00 121 01 00 174 09 00

16 01 00 69 09 00 122 02 00 175 10 00

17 02 00 70 10 00 123 03 00 176 11 00

18 03 00 71 11 00 124 04 00 177 12 00

19 04 00 72 12 00 125 05 00 178 13 00

20 05 00 73 13 00 126 06 00 179 14 00

21 06 00 74 14 00 127 07 00 180 15 00

22 07 00 75 15 00 128 08 00 181 01 00

23 08 00 76 01 00 129 09 00 182 02 00

24 09 00 77 02 00 130 10 00 183 03 00

25 10 00 78 03 00 131 11 00 184 04 00

26 11 00 79 04 00 132 12 00 185 05 00

27 12 00 80 05 00 133 13 00 186 06 00

28 13 00 81 06 00 134 14 00 187 07 00

29 14 00 82 07 00 135 15 00 188 08 00

30 15 00 83 08 00 136 01 00 189 09 00

31 01 00 84 09 00 137 02 00 190 10 00

32 02 00 85 10 00 138 03 00 191 11 00

33 03 00 86 11 00 139 04 00 192 12 00

34 04 00 87 12 00 140 05 00 193 13 00

35 05 00 88 13 00 141 06 00 194 14 00

36 06 00 89 14 00 142 07 00 195 15 00

37 07 00 90 15 00 143 08 00 196 01 00

38 08 00 91 01 00 144 09 00 197 02 00

39 09 00 92 02 00 145 10 00 198 03 00

40 10 00 93 03 00 146 11 00 199 04 00

41 11 00 94 04 00 147 12 00 200 05 00

42 12 00 95 05 00 148 13 00 201 06 00

43 13 00 96 06 00 149 14 00 202 07 00

44 14 00 97 07 00 150 15 00 203 08 00

45 15 00 98 08 00 151 01 00 204 09 00

46 01 00 99 09 00 152 02 00 205 10 00

47 02 00 100 10 00 153 03 00 206 11 00

48 03 00 101 11 00 154 04 00 207 12 00

49 04 00 102 12 00 155 05 00 208 13 00

50 05 00 103 13 00 156 06 00 209 14 00

51 06 00 104 14 00 157 07 00 210 15 00

52 07 00 105 15 00 158 08 00 211 01 00

53 08 00 106 01 00 159 09 00 212 02 00

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

4-6

Communication Defaults for Zones (continued)

ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd

213 03 00 227 02 00 240 15 00 970 00 00

214 04 00 228 03 00 241 01 00 988 00 00

215 05 00 229 04 00 242 02 00 990 00 00

216 06 00 230 05 00 243 03 00 992 (DURESS) 11 00

217 07 00 231 06 00 244 04 00 995 00 00

218 08 00 232 07 00 245 05 00 996 00 00

219 09 00 233 08 00 246 06 00 997 06 00

220 10 00 234 09 00 247 07 00 999 60 00

221 11 00 235 10 00 248 08 00 ALARM RST. 01 00

222 12 00 236 11 00 249 09 00 TROUBLE 01 00

223 13 00 237 12 00 250 10 00 TRBLE. RST 01 00

224 14 00 238 13 00 601-632 00 00 BYPASS 00 00

225 15 00 239 14 00 800-830 00 00 BYP. RST. 00 00

226 01 00

Zone Response Type Definitions

Each zone must be assigned a zone type, which defines

the way in which the system responds to faults in that

zone. There are three keypad-activated zones (panic

keys; see note) for each partition, a polling loop

supervision zone, and four RF supervisory zones, two

for each RF receiver installed. Zone types are defined

below.

Type 00: Zone Not Used

Program with this zone type if the zone is not used.

Type 01: Entry/Exit #1 Burglary

Provides entry delay whenever the zone is faulted and

the system is armed in the AWAY or STAY mode. When

the panel is armed in the INSTANT or MAXIMUM

mode, no entry delay is provided. Exit delay begins

whenever the control is armed, regardless of the arming

mode selected. These delays are programmable.

Assign this zone type to zones that are used for primary

entry to and exit from the facility.

Type 02: Entry/Exit #2 Burglary

Provides a secondary entry delay, if the system is

armed in the AWAY or STAY modes and the zone is

faulted. When the panel is armed in the INSTANT or

MAXIMUM mode, no entry delay is provided.

Secondary exit delay begins whenever the control is

armed, regardless of the arming mode selected. These

delays are programmable.

Assign this zone type to zones that are used for entry

and exit of the facility and require more time than the

primary entry and exit point. Delay times for this zone

type must be greater than those for zone type 01 (e.g., a

garage, loading dock, or basement door).

Type 03: Perimeter Burglary

Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the

system is armed in the AWAY, STAY, INSTANT, or

MAXIMUM mode.

Assign this zone type to all exterior doors and windows.

Type 04: Interior, Follower

Provides a delayed alarm (using the programmed entry

delay time) if an entry/exit zone is faulted first.

Otherwise it produces an instant alarm. It is active

when the system is armed in the AWAY or MAXIMUM

mode, but the MAXIMUM mode eliminates the entry

delay.

If the Interior Follower zone is programmed for one of

the STAY modes (default is STAY mode 1), it is

automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in the

STAY or INSTANT mode.

Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as

a foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must pass

upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad).

Type 05: Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night

Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the

system is armed in the AWAY, STAY, INSTANT, or

MAXIMUM mode. During the disarmed state (day), the

system annunciates a latched trouble sounding from

the keypad (and a central station report, if desired).

Assign this zone type to a zone that contains a foil-

protected door or window (such as in a store), or to a

zone covering a sensitive area such as a stock room or

drug supply room. It can also be used on a zone in an

area where immediate notification of an entry is

desired.

Type 06: 24-Hour Silent Alarm

Sends a report to the central station but provides no

keypad display or sounding. Assign this zone type to a

zone containing an Emergency button.

Type 07: 24-Hour Audible Alarm

Sends a report to the central station and provides an

alarm sound at the keypad and an audible external

alarm. Assign this zone type to a zone containing an

Emergency button.

Type 08: 24-Hour Auxiliary Alarm

Sends a report to central station and provides an alarm

sound at the keypad only. (No other Notification

Appliance Circuit is activated.) Assign this zone

type to a zone an Emergency button or one containing

monitoring devices such as water sensors or

temperature sensors.

Section 4 – Programming

4-7

Type 09: Supervised Fire (Without Verification)

Provides a fire alarm on a short circuit and a trouble

condition on open circuit. A fire alarm produces a

pulsing of the Notification Appliance Circuit. A zone of

this type is always active and cannot be bypassed.

Type 10: Interior with Delay

Provides entry and exit delays (using the programmed

entry and exit delay times) when armed in the AWAY

mode. Provides only exit delay when armed in the

MAXIMUM mode (no entry delay).

If the Interior with Delay zone is programmed for one of

the STAY modes (default is STAY mode 1), it is

automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in the

STAY or INSTANT mode. Delay begins whenever

sensors in this zone are violated, regardless of whether

or not an entry/exit delay zone was tripped first.

Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as

a foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must pass

upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad).

Type 14: PLM Supervision

Provides supervision of remote Panel Link Modules. If

the communication between the local PLM and a

remote PLM fails, a trouble message is produced for the

PLM zone.

Type 16: Fire With Verification

Provides a fire alarm on short circuit and a trouble

condition on open circuit. An initial short causes 7-

second smoke detector power reset. Any subsequent

short within 90 seconds causes a fire alarm. A fire

alarm produces a pulsing of the Notification Appliance

Circuit. A zone of this type is always active and cannot

be bypassed.

Type 17: Fire Waterflow

Provides a trouble condition on open circuit and an

alarm on a short circuit that remains longer than the

programmed time delay (fields 3✳16 and 3✳18). The

alarm can be silenced by either an entry of User Code

+ OFF or when the zone restores (field 3✳14). This type

is always active and can only be bypassed by the

Installer code or the Master code, (field 3✳85).

Type 18: Fire Supervisory

Provides a supervisory response on a short circuit. Open

circuit can be programmed for either a trouble or

supervisory response (field 3✳13). This type is always

active and can only be bypassed by the Installer code or

the Master code, (field 3✳85).

Type 19: 24-Hour Trouble

Provides a trouble response on a short or open circuit.

No alarm sounders are activated.

Type 20: Arm-STAY (5800 Series devices only)

Causes the system to arm in the STAY mode when the

zone is activated.

Type 21: Arm-AWAY (5800 Series devices only)

Causes the system to arm in the AWAY mode when the

zone is activated.

Type 22: Disarm (5800 Series devices only)

Causes the system to disarm when the zone is

activated.

Type 23: No Alarm Response

Used on a zone when an output relay action is desired,

but with no accompanying alarm (e.g., for lobby door

access).

Type 27: Access Point

Assign this zone type to an input device (hardwired

zone, wireless zone, keypad, access control relay, etc.)

that controls an access entry point (e.g., a door). The

access point entry relay can be assigned to an access

control relay (controlled by the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-

250FBP), ECP relay (4204), or to the access control

system independent of the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-

250FBP.

Type 28: Main Logic Board (MLB) Supervision

Used to supervise the MLB. If communication between

the MLB and the VISTA Gateway Module (VGM) fails,

a trouble condition is annunciated for the zone. Also, if

the communication fails, all access control system

(ACS) input zones also display a “CHECK.”

Type 29: Momentary Exit

Used to cause an access point programmed for entry to

revert to an exit point for 15 seconds. After the 15

seconds, it automatically reverts back to an entry point.

Use this zone type only with VistaKey modules.

NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS: Keypad panic zones share the same

zone response type for all 8 partitions, but panics may be

individually enabled for each partition.

IMPORTANT! FAULT ANNUNCIATION

Polling loop and RF troubles (zones 988, 990, and 997) report as

trouble conditions only, and as such, should be assigned zone

type 19 if annunciation is desired. See

Polling Loop Supervision

and

RF System Operation and Supervision

SECTION 3:

Installing the Control

for more information.

Zone Input Type Definitions

Each zone must be assigned an input type, which

defines the where the system will “look” for status of

the zone (RF receiver, polling loop, etc.). Zone input

types are defined below.

Type 01 Hardwired (HW)

Reserved for the built-in hardwired zones 1-9.

Type 02 RF Motion (RM)

Select for 5800 Series transmitters. Sends periodic

check-in signals, fault and low-battery signals. The

control panel automatically restores the zone to “ready”

after a few seconds. This type is designed for facilities

with multiple motion detectors that may fault and

restore simultaneously. The transmitter must remain

within the receiver’s range.

NOTE: If using RF Motion with a door/window type

transmitter, only loop 1 may be used.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

4-8

Type 03 Supervised RF (RF)

Select for 5800 Series transmitters that will be

supervised for check-in signals. The transmitter must

remain within the receiver’s range.

Type 04 Unsupervised RF (UR)

Select for 5800 Series transmitters that will not be

supervised for check-in signals. The transmitter may

therefore be carried off-premises.

Type 05 Unsupervised Button RF (BR)

Select for 5800 Series transmitters specifically designed

for this input type. These transmitters send only fault

signals. They do not send low-battery signals until they

are activated. The transmitter may be carried off-

premises.

Type 06 Serial Number Polling Loop (SL)

Use for V-Plex devices with a built-in serial number.

For VistaKey, select this type for Door Status Monitor

Backup DSMB. If local power to the VistaKey is lost, a

V-Plex SIM, located on the VistaKey board, is powered

directly from the polling loop and reports the state of

the DSM via the standard V-Plex polling system.

NOTE: To obtain the DSMB function, the Input Type

must be defined as 06 and the next prompt in Zone

Programming (Access Point) must contain the Access

Point number (01-15) (address of the VistaKey module).

Type 07 DIP Switch Loop (DP)

Select for polling loop devices that use DIP switches for

programming the zone number of the device.

Type 08 Dip Switch Polling Loop Right Loop (PS)

Select for the second loop of two-zone polling loop

devices (e.g., 4190WH; 4278).

Type 09 Console Input (CS)

Select when this zone is to be controlled by a keypad

input (user code + [#] + [7] + [3]) for access control.

Type 10 PassPoint Access Control (ACS)

Select when this zone is mapped to a zone on the

PassPoint Access Control System.

Type11 VistaKey Door Status Monitor (DSM)

Select this input type when using a VistaKey module

connected to a door. This must be programmed for each

VistaKey module to provide the DSM zone mapping a

panel zone. If this is not programmed the panel will not

“see” the VistaKey module.

It is also used to determine the door is opened after a

card swipe or if the door is being held open. The device

is normally a magnetic switch mounted on the door.

The status of the switch is different when the door is in

an open position.

Type 12 VistaKey Request to Exit (RTE)

Use this input type to map an uncommitted RTE zone

to an alarm panel zone. This input type is not normally

used if the zone is used for a request-to-exit function.

Type 13 VistaKey General Purpose (GP)

This input type operates in the same manner as other

alarm panel zones and is provided so that a zone in the

proximity of the VistaKey can be wired without having

to run additional wiring from the control panel.

Programming for Panel Linking

Step Action

1 Program the Panel Link Module (PLM) into

the system in Device Programming in the #93

Menu Mode with Device Type 10.

2If you want to supervise the PLM, program

zone 8xx with response type 05, where “xx” =

the module’s address. If you want the zone to

report to the central station, make sure the

report code for the zone is set with a non-zero

value.

Step Action

3To supervise the PLMs connected to

other controls, program those modules in

Zone Programming with response type 14.

Also, program the panel ID number. The ID

number must match the ID number

programmed in Device Programming of the

control panel the PLM is connected. To report

to the central station, program the report code

for the zone is set with a non-zero value. Be

sure to program the input type with 00.

See Device Programming and Zone Programming in #93

Menu Mode in the Programming Guide for a detailed

explanation of the programming procedures.

Programming for the Alpha Pager Module

• In field 2*30, enter 1 to enable the Alpha Pager

Module.

• Program fields 2*31 – 2*88 for the paging service

parameters (see the Programming Guide). The

events (e.g., field 2*39) must be programmed

for the pager to work.

• In field *14, enter 1 to enable the RS232 input (J2

Pin 5).

• In field 3*19, enter 1 to enable the RS232 input (J2

Pin 5).

• If you have a printer connected to the module,

program field 1*69 with a 0 for a parallel printer or

a1 for a serial printer.

• Additionally, field 05 may be programmed when

using the Alpha Pager Module.

Fields for programming the delay times (e.g.

2*36 and 2*37 for pager 1) are relevant only

when using numeric format for the pager.

Section 4 – Programming

4-9

Programming for Access Control

VistaKey

See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide for

the detailed programming instructions.

VistaKey Dialer Enables

When the VistaKey is installed with an alarm system,

the system defaults are set so that the system does not

send reports to the central station. The programming is

accomplished in field 1∗35 for the following events:

• ACS Troubles - To enable or disable ACS trouble

reporting.

• ACS Bypasses - To enable or disable ACS bypass

reporting.

• ACS System - To enable or disable ACS system

reporting, (i.e., ACS module reset).

• ACS Alarms - To enable or disable ACS alarm

reporting.

• Dialer (Trace) - To enable or disable access

grant/denial events sent to the central station.

The PassPoint ACS can dedicate some of its inputs for

use as regular control panel hardwired zones (the zone

response type is ACS). The PassPoint ACS can also

utilize the control panel dialer for reports to the central

station.

Using ACS Zone Inputs

If the PassPoint ACS has uncommitted zones, these

may be used by the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP as

hardwired zones. To program for ACS zone inputs,

perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu

Mode.

2 Program this zone as any other zone. Indicate

the input type as ACS (10).

3 Enter the PassPoint ACS’s zone ID (00-31)

See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a

detailed explanation.

PassPoint Dialer Events

All PassPoint ACS events can be sent to the VISTA-

128FBP/VISTA-250FBP dialer via the VGM. These

events will also be logged into the control’s event log.

This is enabled in the PassPoint ACS. See the PassPoint

ACS documentation for a detailed explanation.

Programming the VISTA Gateway Module

See the PassPoint ACS instructions to program the

VISTA Gateway Module.

Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point Using VistaKey

or PassPoint

The control can send entry and exit requests to the

VistaKey or PassPoint ACS utilizing keypads and

button-type (BR) RF transmitters. A zone is

programmed with a response type 27 (Access Point) and

an appropriate input type (console, RF).

Using the Alpha Keypad

Step Action

1 Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu

Mode.

2 Program the zone with a response type 27

(Access Point).

3 Enter the access point number (00-31) of the

door.

4 Program whether this is an entry or exit point.

5 Enter the partition number.

6 Enter the input type as CS (09).

7 Enter the keypad ECP address.

See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a

detailed explanation.

Using an RF Transmitter Zone

A button type RF transmitter (5804) can be used to

provide access or egress for up to 4 doors. One button

will control one door. Also, a button can be used to

provide access or egress due to a panic or duress

condition.

An RF transmitter (5816) can be used with a remote

switch to provide exit in case of a fire alarm using a

PassPoint event action.

To program the RF transmitter for access control,

perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu

Mode.

2 Program the zone with a response type 27

(Access Point).

3 Enter the access point number (00-31) of the

door.

4 Indicate whether RF device is for entry or exit.

5 Enter the partition number

6 Enter the input type: button RF (05).

7 Enter the loop number.

8 Enroll the serial number

See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a

detailed explanation.

• RF buttons and pendants must be assigned

to a user number in order to function. See

the

SECTION 9: User Access Codes

for the

procedure.

• An RF transmitter will not provide access or

grant if the system is in any test mode.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

4-10

Using Wireless Keypads

Wireless keypads (5827 & 5827BD) can provide another

way of entering or exiting the premises. They function

the same as alpha keypads, except when the code + # 73

is entered. This entry will allow momentary access to

ALL access points in the partition to which the keypad

is assigned To program the wireless keypad, enter the

partition the keypad is assigned to in field 1*48.

Control of Lighting and Appliances

Lighting and appliances can be controlled when an

access or exit event occurs. Lights or appliances can be

automatically turned on or off when a valid entry or

egress request is presented at an access point. To

control these devices, the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-

250FBP relays or the ACS relays or triggers are used

with keypads and/or RF transmitters whose response

type is Access Point (27).

To program the control of lighting and appliances,

perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter Output Programming in the #93 Menu

Mode.

2 Program all the information for the relay.

3 Select the output type: ECP (1) (4204/4204CF).

See Output Programming in the Programming Guide

for a detailed explanation.

Using the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP for Stand-

Alone Access Control

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP can be used for

access control without interfacing to PassPoint ACS or

VistaKey. A user can trigger an access point (i.e., door

strike) for 2 seconds by entering User Code + [0].

To program the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP for

Stand-Alone access control, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter Output Programming in the #93 Menu

Mode.

2 Program the output type as 1, or 2.

3 For type 1, program the ECP address and

relay number.

4 For type 2, program the house and unit codes.

5Program the relay number in field 1∗76

(partition-specific).

See Output Programming in the Programming Guide

for a detailed explanation.

Programming for ECP Long Range Radio

• Program the LRR in Device Programming in the

#93 Menu Mode Programming.

• Program field ✳56: Selects the time the panel

should wait before it attempts to send a message to

the second destination..

• Program field ✳57: Selects the initial reporting

destination for messages.

• Program field ✳58: Selects events for the primary

sub’s ID

• Program field ✳59: Selects events for the secondary

sub’s ID.

Programming for the Event Log

• Program field 1✳70 Event Log Types (1=enable;

0=disable for each type)

• Program field 1✳71 12/24-Hour Time Stamp

Format (0=12 hr; 1=24 hr)

• Program field 1✳72 Event Log Printer On-line

(0=disable; 1=enable)

• Program field 1✳73 Printer Baud Rate (1=300;

0=1200)

• Program Event Log Report Codes System Group

#2 in the #93 Menu Mode.

5-1

SECTION 5

Data Field Descriptions

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

About Data Field Programming

The following pages list this control’s data fields in numerical order. Field numbers are listed in the left column, followed

by a “Title and Data Entries column, which lists the valid entries for each field. Experienced installers can simply follow

this column when programming the data fields. The “Explanation” column provides explanatory information and special

notes where applicable.

NOTE: Refer to the Programming Guide for the default values. They are not listed in this section.

Use the

Programming Guide

to record the data for this installation.

NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,

and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250FBP’s features. See SECTION 1: General Description for the

table listing the differences between the VISTA-128FBP and the VISTA-250FBP control panels.

Programming Data Fields

Data field programming involves making the appropriate entries for each of the data fields. Start Data Field

programming by entering the installer code + 8 + 0 + 0 + 0.

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*00 Installer Code

Enter 4 digits, 0-9

The Installer Code is a 4-digit code reserved for installation company use.

This is the only code that can be used to enter the Program Mode from the

keypad. This code cannot be used to disarm the system if it isn’t used to arm

the system. This code cannot be used to re-enter Program Mode if Program

Mode is exited by the *98 command.

*04 Enable Random Timers For

Partitions 1-8

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the activation time of the window is randomized up to 30 minutes

and is initialized by either of two methods:

User Code + [#] + [41] Initiates the random schedule for all devices in the

partition.

User Code + [#] + [42]

Initiates the random schedule for all devices in the

partition with a time window within 6 PM and 5 AM.

*05 System Events Notify

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled the system sends notification messages via the RS232 port on the

J2 triggers to interface with Home Control type software. Field 3*19 must be

set for RS232 (1).

NOTE: If enabled, the system also sends fault and restore messages via the

RS232 port.

*06 Quick Exit (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows users to exit the armed partition without disarming and then

rearming the partition.

Quick Exit is initiated by entering [#] + [9]. This restarts the exit delay. All rules

of exit apply, including exit error logic.

*08 Temporal Siren Pulse

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the pulse rate for an output programmed for pulsing (field 3✳15)

will be three dings and a pause, repeated. If disabled, the pulse rate will be

one second on, one second off.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

5-2

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*09 Entry Delay #1 (partition-specific)

Enter 02-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.

00 = no delay.

Entry delay defines the delay time that allows users to re-enter the premises

through a door that has been programmed as an entry delay door and disarm

the system without sounding an alarm. The system must be disarmed within

this period or an alarm will occur.

NOTE: The delay may not exceed 45 seconds for UL installations. The entry

delay time and Burg Alarm Comm Delay (field *88) combined cannot exceed 1

minute for SIA installations.

*10 Exit Delay #1 (partition-specific)

Enter 03-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.

00 = no delay.

Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the premises

through a door that has been programmed as an entry/exit delay door after

arming the system without setting off the alarm.

NOTE: The delay must be set for a minimum 45 seconds for SIA installations.

*11 Entry Delay #2 (partition-specific)

Enter 02-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.

00 = no delay.

Entry Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than

those assigned to Entry Delay #1.

NOTE: The delay may not exceed 45 seconds for UL installations. The entry

delay time and Burg Alarm Comm Delay (field *88) combined cannot exceed 1

minute for SIA installations.

*12 Exit Delay #2 (partition-specific)

Enter 03-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.

00 = no delay.

Exit Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those

assigned to Exit Delay #1.

NOTE: The delay may not exceed 60 seconds for UL installations. The delay

must be set for a minimum 45 seconds for SIA installations.

*13 Bell 1 Timeout

Enter 01-15 multiplied by 2 minutes.

00 = no timeout.

Defines the length of time the Bell 1 Output and the keypad’s sounder will

sound for all audible alarms.

Must be minimum 16 minutes for UL Commercial Burglary installations. Must

be minimum 6 minutes for UL Commercial Fire and SIA installations.

Trigger or RS232 Input

0 = trigger

1 = RS232 input

Select if J2 Pin 5 should be set Fire Alarm trigger output or as an RS232

input. If set for RS232, this enables the system to receive serial data (75

baud).

UL Using the RS232 input for automation is not permitted in UL installations.

*14

*15 Keyswitch Assignment

Enter 1-8 partition keyswitch is being used.

Enter 9 if the keyswitch is being used to

silence fire Notification Appliance Circuits in

the event of a fire alarm.

Enter 0 if the keyswitch is not used.

The keyswitch requires the use of zone 7 wired loop (zone 7 is no longer

available as protection zone). The fire and panic alarm voltage triggers (J2)

automatically become ARMING and READY status outputs for the Keyswitch

LEDs.

Openings/closing report as user “0” if enabled in field *40.

*16 Bell 1 Confirmation of Arming

Ding (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, produces ½-second external alarm sounding (“ding”) at the end of

exit delay (or after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing reports).

Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations.

*17 AC Loss Keypad Sounding

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, sounding at the keypad (rapid beeping) occurs when AC power is

lost (sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss).

*19 Randomize AC Loss Report

0 = disable

1 = randomize for 10-40 min. after AC Loss

2 = randomize for 6-12 hours after AC Loss

If disabled, AC loss reporting about 2 minutes after actual AC loss.

Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at the

central station during a community blackout.

*20 VIP Module Phone Code

1-9 = first digit of access code

∗ or # = second digit of access code (enter #

+11 for “∗”, or # +12 for “#”)

To disable enter 00 for the 1st digit

If a 4285/4286 Voice Module is being used, enter the 2-digit phone code used

to access the system.

Must be disabled for UL installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-3

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*22 Keypad Panic Enables (partition-

specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the keypad panics (zones 995, 996, and 999) may be used in this

partition. There are 3 entries in this field, one for each panic.

*23 Multiple Alarms (partition-

specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows more than one alarm sounding for a given zone during an

armed period.

NOTE: that multiple alarm soundings will not occur more frequently than

allowed by the programmed alarm sounder duration. This has no impact on

the number of communication messages transmitted.

Must be 1 for UL installations.

*24 Ignore Expansion Zone Tamper

0 = disable (tamper detection)

1 = enable (no tamper detection)

If disabled, the system monitors the tampers on expansion zones.

NOTE: Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper switches or

5800 Series transmitters.

Must be 0 for UL installations.

*25 Burglary Trigger for Response

Type 8

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows triggering of the voltage output 3 on Pin 3 of the J2 header

to include zone response type 8 (24-hr. auxiliary).

*26 Intelligent Test Report

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, no test report is sent if any other type of report was sent since the

last test report.

If disabled, test reports are sent at the set intervals, regardless of whether or

not any other report has been sent.

Must be 0 for UL applications.

*27 Test Report Interval

Enter 0001-9999 for the test report interval in

hours.

Enter 0000 for test reporting.

If a test report is desired, enter a test code in

Report Code Programming

#93 Menu Mode

. Set first test report time in field *83.

Maximum Test report interval is 0024 for UL commercial installations.

*28 Power-Up in Previous State

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system, upon power-up, reverts to its status prior to a complete

power loss.

If disabled, the system always powers up in a disarmed state.

NOTE: Neither authority level 0 nor 5 can be used to disarm the system if the

control powers up armed.

Must be 1for UL applications.

*29 Quick Arm (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows arming of the burglary system in AWAY, STAY, INSTANT,

or MAXIMUM mode by using the [#] key instead of the user code.

NOTES:

When armed, the system reports closing as User 0 if Open/Close reporting for

User #2 (typically a Master level user) was enabled for a given partition.

If Quick Arm is used, the Installer Code and Authority Level 5 codes cannot

disarm the system.

Main Dialer TouchTone or Rotary

Dial

0 = rotary

1 = touchtone

Select the dialing method for the main dialer.

If you select TouchTone, make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for TouchTone service. Note that

whether or not TouchTone dialing for call placement is permitted, communication by the use of DTMF signaling

(ADEMCO High Speed) will still take place. See field 1*33 for TouchTone w/Rotary backup

*30

*31 PABX Access Code

Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)

This field is used to enter up to four 2-digit numbers representing the prefix

needed to obtain an outside telco line. If not required, enter nothing and

proceed to next field.

*32 Primary Subscriber’s Account

Number (partition-specific)

Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)

Enter a 3- or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber account

number. Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of

hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used, enter data

only in the first 3 locations, and enter * in the fourth location.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

5-4

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*33 Primary Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the primary central station phone number, up to 17 digits. This is the

phone number the control will use to transmit Alarm and status messages to

the central station. Do not fill unused spaces.

NOTE: Backup reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number is

entered.

*34 Secondary Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the secondary phone number, up to 17 digits. The secondary phone

number is used if communication on the primary number is unsuccessful, or if

split/dual reporting is desired. Do not fill unused spaces.

NOTE: If this field is programmed, a secondary subscriber account number

(field *90)

must

also be programmed.

*35 Download Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the downloading phone number, up to 17 digits. Do not fill unused

spaces.

NOTE: This field is applicable only if downloading is utilized.

*36 Download ID Number

Make entries as 2-digit numbers as follows:

00=0 01=1 02=2 03=3 04=4 05=5

06=6 07=7 08=8 09=9 10=A 11=B

12=C 13=D 14=E 15=F

Enter eight digits.

NOTE: This field is applicable only if downloading is utilized.

*37 Download Command Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

Enabling a function means that you are able to perform that function via the

ADEMCO Compass Downloading software.

Functions are as follows: Dialer Shutdown; System Shutdown; Not Used;

Remote Bypass; Remote Disarm; Remote Arm; Upload Program; Download

Program.

For UL commercial burglary and fire installations, all entries must be 0.

*38 Prevent Zone XXX Bypass

(partition-specific)

Enter a zone number (001-250).

Enter 000 if all zones can be bypassed.

Enter three digits for zone that cannot be bypassed by the user.

NOTES:

The actions manual bypass, group bypass, auto-stay, and STAY/INSTANT

arming modes cannot bypass any zone programmed in this field.

The system will not arm if the zone is programmed with the vent zone or force

arm fault attributes.

*39 Enable Open/Close Report for

Installer Code (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, whenever the Installer Code is used to arm or disarm the partition,

an open/close report is sent to the central station.

*40 Enable Open/Close report for

Keyswitch

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, whenever the keyswitch is used to arm or disarm the partition, an

open/close report is sent to the central station.

*41 Normally Closed or EOLR (Zones

3-8)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If disabled, end-of-line resistors must be used on zones 3-8.

If enabled end-of-line resistors cannot be used and only normally closed

devices must be used.

Must be 0for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

*42 Dial Tone Pause

Enter the wait time for dial tone detection:

0 = 5 seconds; 1 = 11 seconds; 2= 30

seconds.

Enter the time the system waits for dial tone before dialing. Applies if true dial

tone is not selected in field *43.

Must be 0for UL installations.

*43 Dial Tone Detection

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system waits for true dial tone. If no dial tone is detected,

control dials at end of pause programmed in field *42.

If disabled, the system pauses for seconds entered in field *42, then dials.

NOTE: Disabling may be necessary in high-noise environment telco networks

where noise can be confused with dial tone, resulting in premature dialing.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-5

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*44 Ring Detection Count

Enter 00 to disable ring detection.

Enter 01-14 for ring counts of 1-14.

Enter 15 to select Answering Machine Defeat

Mode

Only applicable if using a 4285/4286 VIP Module and/or if station-initiated

downloading will be used.

NOTES:

Do not enter 00 if a 4285/4286 is installed.

In the Answering Machine Mode, the caller should let the phone ring once,

then hang up, and call again within 30 seconds. The system, upon hearing

one ring followed by nothing, does not answer the first call, but readies itself to

pick up on the first ring of the next incoming call that is received within 30

seconds (i.e., the downloader calling again).

Must be 00 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

*45 Primary Format

0=Low Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO

High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express

Enter the reporting format for the primary telephone number.

*46 Low Speed Format (Primary)

0 = ADEMCO Low Speed

1 = Sescoa/Radionics

Enter the low speed format for the primary telephone number.

*47 Secondary Format

0=Low Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO

High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express

Enter the reporting format for the secondary telephone number.

*48 Low Speed Format (Secondary)

0 = ADEMCO Low Speed

1 = Sescoa/Radionics

Enter the low speed format for the secondary telephone number.

*49 Checksum Verification

Enter 2 digits, one for the primary and one

for the secondary.

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system for either or both primary/secondary formats sends a

verification digit to validate the message at the receiver without having to send

two message rounds. Selection is valid for 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 reports.

*50 Sescoa/Radionics Select

0 = disable

1 = enable

If disabled, selects Radionics, which uses hexadecimal 0-9, B-F reporting.

If enabled, selects Sescoa, which uses only numeric reporting (0-9).

NOTE: The selection applies to both primary and secondary phone numbers.

*51 Dual Reporting

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, all reports are to be sent to both primary and secondary phone

numbers.

NOTE: If used with Split Reporting option 1 (1*34), alarms go to both primary

and secondary numbers, while all other reports go to secondary only. If used

with Split Reporting option 2, alarms go to both, open/close and test

messages go to secondary only, while all other reports go to primary. If used

with Split Reporting option 3, fire alarms and supervisory reports go to

primary, all other reports go to secondary.

*52 Standard/Expanded Reporting

Primary

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Restore, Bypass, Trouble,

Open/Close, Low Battery. If enabled, expanded reports are sent to the

primary phone number if low speed format is selected in field *45.

NOTE: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.

*53 Standard/Expanded Reporting

Secondary

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Restore, Bypass, Trouble,

Open/Close, Low Battery. If enabled, expanded reports are sent to the

secondary phone number if low speed format is selected in field *47.

NOTE: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.

*54 Unattended Mode

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system automatically calls the downloader at programmed

intervals.

NOTE: The following fields must be programmed first: primary subscriber

account number – field *32; primary phone number – field *33; downloader

phone number – field *35. Or you can go into the Unattended Program Mode,

from normal operating mode, by entering Installer Code + [#] + [8] + [9].

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

5-6

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*56 Dynamic Signaling Delay

Enter 00-15 times 15 seconds.

Select the time the panel should wait for acknowledgment from the first

reporting destination before it attempts to send a message to the second

destination (first and second destinations are determined in field ✳57).

NOTE: If the acknowledgment is received before the delay time expires, no

message is sent to the second destination.

*57 Dynamic Signaling Priority

0 = Primary Dialer

1 = Long Range Radio

Select the initial reporting path for central station messages.

*58 Long Range Radio Central

Station #1 Category Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, Test. If enabled, the reports are sent to the primary subscriber ID of

the Long Range Radio.

*59 Long Range Radio Central

Station #2 Category Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, Test. If enabled, the reports are sent to the secondary subscriber ID

of the Long Range Radio.

*77 Auto Trouble Restore

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, each trouble and supervisory condition automatically clears the

keypad display and stops the keypad beeping when the zone returns to a

“ready/normal” state. This applies to ALL trouble and supervisory types. The

system also sends the Trouble/Supervisory Restore report to the central

station, if programmed.

If a partition has more than one trouble/supervisory condition present at the

same time, the system automatically clears the keypad display of each zone

as it restores, but the keypad continues to beep until all the zones restore.

*79 Zone Type Restores for Zone

Types 1-8

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has eight entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that

will send Restore reports.

*80 Zone Type Restores for Zone

Types 9 & 10

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has two entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that

will send Restore reports.

*83 First Test Report Time

Enter 00-07the for day (01 = Monday)

Enter 00-23 for the hour

Enter 00-59 for the minutes

Enter the day and time that the first Test report shall be transmitted. Enter 00

in all locations if the Test report is to be sent immediately upon exiting. Enter

00 in the day location if the report is to be sent at the next occurrence of the

time that is set.

*84 Swinger Suppression (partition-

specific)

Enter 01-15.

Enter 00 for unlimited reports

This option limits the number of messages (alarms or troubles) sent for a

specific zone in an armed period. The system automatically resets the

shutdown for a zone after 48 hours if there are no trips on any zone.

Must be 00 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

*85 Enable Dialer Reports for Panics

& Duress (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has four entries as follows: Zone 995, 996, 999, Duress Enable for

each partition that the panics and duress reporting is desired.

NOTE: Non-zero report code must be assigned to zone 992 (duress) to

enable Duress reporting.

*87 Entry Warning (partition-specific)

0 = 3 short beeps

1 = slow continuous beeps

Select the type of warning for the entry delay period.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-7

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

*88 Burglary Alarm Communicator

Delay (partition-specific)

0 = no delay

1 = 30-second delay

Select the delay, if any, for burglary alarm communications.

Must be 0for UL installations.

Must be 1 for SIA installations.

*89 Restore Report Timing

0 = instant

1 = after bell timeout

2 = when system is disarmed

Select the time when restore reports are sent after an alarm.

Must be 2 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

*90 Secondary Subscriber Account

Number (partition-specific)

Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)

Enter a 3- or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber account

number. Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of

hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used, enter data

only in the first 3 locations, and enter * in the fourth location.

NOTE: This field

must

be programmed if a secondary phone number is used

(field *34). This account number can be the same as the primary account

number.

1*15 Cancel Verify

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system pulses the alarm output three times and displays

“Cancel Sent to Central Station” when it receives a kissoff of a Cancel report.

This message can only be cleared by entering the code + off. Enter 0 to

disable.

NOTE: Field 1✳52 determines when a Cancel report is sent to the central

station.

1*17 Lobby Partition

0 = none

1-8 = partition number

Select the Common Lobby Partition.

1*18 Affects Lobby (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, causes lobby partition to disarm when this partition disarms.

NOTE: This partition must be armed before lobby can be armed.

1*19 Arms Lobby (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the lobby

partition. Field, field 1*18 must also be enabled (partition-specific).

NOTES:

The lobby cannot be armed unless all partitions programmed for “affect” (field

1*18) is already armed.

If this field is enabled, Field 1*18 for this partition must also be enabled.

Exit Error Logic Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system at the end of exit delay, if an entry door or an interior

zone is left open, starts the entry delay period, and activates the Notification

Appliance Circuit(s), and keypad sounders for the duration of entry delay.

This gives the user time to re-enter the premises and disarm the system

before exit error occurs.

If the user does not re-enter the premises and disarm the system, the system

bypasses the faulted entry/exit and/or interior zone(s). The rest of the system

is armed. Also, the following dialer reports are sent to the central station if

programmed:

Exit Error by User (not sent when is using ADEMCO High Speed format);

Entry/Exit or Interior Alarm with the zone number;

Bypass reports.

NOTE: This field must be enabled for SIA installations

UL Exit Error Logic is not suitable for use in a UL installation (must be 0).

1*20

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

5-8

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

Exit Delay Reset

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, when the panel is armed, the normal exit delay begins. After the

user exits, closes the door and then re-enters the premises, the exit delay

time is reset to the programmed value.

NOTES:

Exit Delay Reset is designed to allow an operator to re-enter the premises to

retrieve a forgotten item without triggering an alarm.

This feature may only be activated once after arming. The Exit Delay must be

enabled for SIA installations.

UL Exit Delay Reset is not suitable for use in a UL installation (must be 0).

1*21

Cross-Zoning

UL Cross Zoning is not suitable for use in a UL installation.

Cross Zoning is designed so that a combination of two zones must be faulted within a 5-minute period of each other to cause

an alarm on either zone. This prevents momentary faults from one of the zones from causing an alarm condition. You can

select four "sets" of cross-zones (programmed in data fields 1*22, 1*23, 1*24, and 1*25), keeping in mind the following:

• Both zones in each set must protect the same area.

• Both zones in each set must be in the same partition.

• A fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone protecting the same physical area (see warning below).

DO NOT cross-zone a fire zone with a burglary zone under any circumstance. Cross a fire zone with another fire

zone only, and BOTH must be protecting the same physical area (no walls or partitions separating them). Consult

NFPA 72 standard for exact spacing requirements. We recommend that spacing between fire cross-zones be no

farther than 30 ft

Conditions That Affect Cross-Zone Operation

• In the event of a continuous fault (lasting at least 5 minutes) on one of the paired zones, a fault on the second zone

causes an alarm immediately.

• If one of the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to 0, the cross-zoning feature does not apply.

• If an entry/exit zone is paired with an interior follower zone, be sure to enter the entry/exit zone as the first zone of the

pair. This ensures that the entry delay time is started before the follower zone is processed.

• If a relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones, the relay activates without the other zone being faulted.

• If a relay is programmed to activate on an alarm or trouble, both zones must trip before the relay activates, and both

zones must restore for the relay to deactivate (if relay is programmed to deactivate on a Zone List Restore).

If the one of the zones trips and the second zone does not trip within the 5-minute period, an “error” message is

reported to the central station. The Contact ID event code is 378.

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

1*22 Cross Zoning Pair One

Enter 001-250

Enter 000,000 to disable

Select the first pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a five-

minute period to cause an alarm.

Must be 000,000 for UL commercial burglary installations.

1*23 Cross Zoning Pair Two

Enter 001-250

Enter 000,000 to disable

Select the second pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a

five-minute period to cause an alarm.

Must be 000,000 for UL commercial burglary installations.

1*24 Cross Zoning Pair Three

Enter 001-250

Enter 000,000 to disable

Select the third pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a five-

minute period to cause an alarm.

Must be 000,000 for UL commercial burglary installations.

1*25 Cross Zoning Pair Four

Enter 001-250

Enter 000,000 to disable

Select the fourth pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a five-

minute period to cause an alarm.

Must be 000,000 for UL commercial burglary installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-9

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

1*26 Panic Button or Speedkey

For A, B, C keys:

00 = panic function

01-35 = macro number

For D key:

00 = to select a macro to execute when key

is pressed

01-35 = macro number

Select for the A, B, and C keys whether the system performs a panic or a

speedkey function when the key is pressed.

Select for the D key whether the system performs a specific macro or if the

user will select a macro when the key is pressed.

Instead of the 32 programmable speedkey functions the keys can be

programmed for 3 other functions as follows:

33 = fire sounder silence. The key, when pressed, silences fire alarms.

34 = display next fire alarm. The key, when pressed, causes the keypad to

display the next fire alarm in the system.

35 = display previous fire alarm. The key, when pressed, causes the keypad

to display the previous fire alarm in the system.

NOTE: Selection 33 functions when field 3✳15 is enabled for pulsing.

Selections 34 and 35 should be used in conjunction with Fire Display Lock

(field 3✳01).

NOTE: If a user code with global arm/disarm is used to execute the macro,

the user’s global capabilities will override any arm/disarm commands in the

macro sequence.

1*28 RF Transmitter Low Battery

Sound

0 = disarmed state only

1 = both armed and disarmed states

Select when the RF transmitter low-battery condition should display and

audible beep annunciate on the keypad.

Must be 1 for UL installations.

1*29 RF Transmitter Low Battery

Reporting

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system sends a Trouble message for RF transmitter low-

battery condition to the central station.

NOTE: The Trouble message will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure,

independent of this selection.

Must be 1 for UL installations.

1*30 RF Receiver Supervision Check-

in Interval

Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).

00 = disable receiver supervision.

Select the check-in monitoring interval for the RF receiver(s).

Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time entered results in

the activation of the response type programmed for zone 990 for the first

receiver and zone 988 for the second receiver and their related

communication reports.

Maximum is 2 (4 hr) for UL installations.

1*31 RF Transmitter Check-in Interval

Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).

00 = disable transmitter supervision.

Select the check-in monitoring interval for the RF transmitters.

Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal within the time

entered will result in a trouble response and related communication report.

Maximum is 2 (4 hr) for UL installations.

1*33 TouchTone with Rotary Backup

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system reverts to rotary dialing if communicator is not

successful in dialing using TouchTone DTMF on first attempt.

1*34 Communicator Split Reporting

0 = Split Reporting disabled

1 = Alarm, Alarm Restore, and Cancel

reports to primary, all others to secondary

2 = Open/Close and Test reports to

secondary, all other reports to primary

3 = Fire Alarms and Fire Restores to

primary, all others to secondary

Select the type of split reporting for system communication.

NOTE: See *51 for split/dual reporting combinations.

1*35 Access Control Dialer Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

There are six entries for this field as follows: Trace, Trouble, Not Used,

Bypass, System, Alarm.

If Trace is enabled, access grant/denial events sent to the central station.

For the other events, if enabled, a report is sent to the central station.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

5-10

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

1*42 Call Waiting Defeat

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system defeats Call Waiting on the first outgoing call attempt to

both the primary and secondary numbers.

NOTES:

After the panel's initial call to report the alarm, the panel may attempt to make

an additional call, perhaps for a cancel or a zone restoral. If Call Waiting is

not defeated, an operator at the central station attempting to contact the

premises (to verify whether the alarm is valid) hears the phone ringing

indefinitely and must to dispatch on the call.

DO NOT enable this feature unless Call Waiting is being used.

1*43 Permanent Keypad Display

Backlighting (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, backlighting for the keypad display remains on at all times.

Otherwise the backlighting comes on when a key is pressed.

NOTE: When a key is pressed, display backlighting turns on for all keypads in

that partition.

1*44 Wireless Keypad Tamper Detect

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, when more than 40 key depressions are received without a valid

sequence (arm, disarm, etc.), the control panel disables the wireless keypad.

The inhibit is removed once a valid key sequence is received from a wired

keypad.

1*45 Exit Delay Sounding (partition-

specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system produces slow beeping from the keypads during exit

delay and reverts to rapid beeping during the last 10 seconds of the exit delay.

NOTES:

The duration of the beeping is the programmed value of field *10 regardless of

which entry/exit zone is used to exit the premises. Exit Delay Sounding must

be enabled for SIA installations.

See page 32 in the

Programming Guide

, “SOUND OPTION”, prompt for

disabling the entry/exit beeps on individual keypads.

1*47 Chime on Bell 1 (partition-

specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system produces chime annunciation on the Bell 1 output.

1*48 Wireless Keypad Assignment

0 = none

1-8 = partition number

Select the partition in which RF keypad is used.

1*49 Suppress Transmitter

Supervision Sound

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, no trouble soundings occur on the keypad for transmitter check-in

failures.

Must be 0 for UL installations.

1*52 Send Cancel If Alarm + Off

(partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, Cancel reports are sent when the system is disarmed after an

alarm, regardless of how much time has gone by.

If disabled, Cancel reports are sent within Bell Timeout period only.

NOTES:

This option must be enabled so Cancel reports are always sent.

This field must be enabled for SIA installations.

1*53 Disable Download Callback

0 = callback required

1 = no callback required

Select whether a callback from the control panel is required for downloading.

Must be 0 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

1*55 European Date Format

0 = disable (mm/dd/yy)

enable (dd/mm/yy)

Select the date format for display in the event log.

1*56 AC 60Hz or 50Hz

0 = 60Hz

1 = 50Hz

Select the frequency for the AC.

Must be set to 0 for U.S. and Canadian installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-11

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

1*57 Enable 5800 RF Button Global

Arm

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system arms/disarms in accordance with the button’s user’s

global arming settings.

1*58 Enable 5800 RF Button Force

Arm

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows the RF button user to force a bypass of all faulted zones

when arming the system.

NOTE: When attempting to arm the system, the keypad beeps once after the

button is pressed if any faulted zones are present. The user should then

press the button again within 4 seconds to force-bypass those zones and arm

the system.

1*60 Zone 5 Audio Alarm Verification

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, zone 5 is used for 2-way audio (AAV).

Must be 0 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

NOTE: Zone 5 cannot be used as protection zone.

1*69 Printer Type

0 = parallel printer

1 = serial printer

Select the printer type for the event log printout.

NOTE: if you are using a parallel printer connected to the VA8201 Alpha

Pager Module.

1*70 Event Log Types

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Check, Bypass, Open/Close,

System. If enabled, the system logs those events into the event log.

NOTE: Events are also logged into the PassPoint system, if installed.

1*71 12/24 Hour Type Stamp Format

0 = 12-hour

1 = 24-hour

Select the type of time stamping for the event log.

1*72 Event Log Printer On-Line Mode

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system prints the events as they occur.

If disabled, the system prints the log only upon request.

1*73 Printer Baud Rate

0 = 1200

1 = 300

Select the baud rate for the serial printer.

NOTE: Must be 1 if using the alphanumeric pager interface.

1*74 Relay Timeout XXX Minutes

Enter 000-127 times 2 minutes (000-254).

This is used for #80 Menu Mode Time-Driven event relay command numbers

“04/09” and

Output Programming

in the

#93 Menu Mode Programming

output

command “56.”

1*75 Relay Timeout YYY Seconds

Enter 000-127 seconds.

This is used for #80 Menu Mode Time-Driven event relay command numbers

“05/10” and

Output Programming

in the

#93 Menu Mode Programming

command “57.”

1*76 Access Control Relay (partition-

specific)

01-96 = relay number

00 = relay not used.

If enabled, the assigned relay closes for 2 seconds when the user enters his

code and presses 0.

Must be 00 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

NOTE: See

SECTION 3: Installing the Control

for enhanced access control

capabilities.

1*77 Log First Maintenance Signal

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system logs the first maintenance signal from each smoke

detector. If disabled, no logging occurs.

2*00 Number of Partitions

Enter 1-8.

Enter the number of partitions used in the system.

2*01 Daylight Saving Time Start/End

Month

0 = disable

1 = enable

Enter the months (00-12) in which daylight saving time starts and ends.

Enter 00, 00 if daylight saving time does not apply to the user’s region.

Standard setting for U.S. is 04,10.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

5-12

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

2*02 Daylight Saving Time Start/End

Weekend

0 = disable

1 = enable

Enter the start and end weekends for daylight saving time as follows: 1=first;

2=second; 3=third; 4=fourth; 5=last; 6=next to last; 7=third from last.

Standard setting for U.S. is 1,5.

UL Fields 2*05 – 2*08 must be set to 0 for UL installations.

2*05 Auto-Arm Delay (partition-

specific)

00 = no delay.

01-14 times 4 minutes (04-56) delay.

15 = no auto arming.

This is the time between the end of the arming window and the start of auto-

arm warning time (field 2*06).

2*06 Auto-Arm Warning Period

(partition-specific)

01-15 times 1-minute warning.

00 = no warning period.

This is the time that the user is warned by a keypad sounding and display to

exit the premises prior to auto arming of the system.

2*07 Auto-Disarm Delay (partition-

specific)

00 = no delay.

01-14 times 4 minutes (04-56) delay.

15 = no auto disarming.

This is the time between the end of the disarming window and the start of auto

disarming of the system.

2*08 Force Arm Enable for Auto-Arm

(partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system automatically bypasses any faulted zones when it

attempts to auto-arm.

If disabled, the system will not auto-arm.

2*09 Open/Close Reports by

Exception (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, Open/Close reports are sent only if the openings/closings occur

outside the arm and disarm windows.

NOTES:

Open reports are also suppressed during the closing window in order to

prevent false alarms if the user arms the system, then re-enters the premises,

for example to retrieve a forgotten item.

Openings and closings are still recorded in the event log.

This field must be set to 1 if No Opening and No Closing reports are to be

sent.

2*10 Allow Disarming Only During

Arm/Disarm Windows (partition-

specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, disarming of the system is allowed only during the

arming/disarming windows, or if the system is in alarm (if 2*11 is set to 1).

NOTE: This applies only to Operator-level users. Installer, Master, and

Manager-level users can disarm the system at any time.

2*11 Allow Disarm Outside Window if

Alarm Occurs

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows the system to be disarmed outside the programmed disarm

(opening) window if an alarm has occurred. Otherwise disarming is allowed

only during the disarm window.

NOTE: Used only if field 2*10 is enabled.

2*18 Enable GOTO for this Partition

(partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, this partition can be accessed from another partition’s keypad

using the GOTO command.

2*19 Use Partition Descriptor

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the normal keypad display will include a partition number and four-

digit descriptor.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-13

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

2*20 Enable J2 Triggers for Partition

(partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the J2 triggers function for this partition.

2*21 Supervision Pulses for LRR

0 = disable

1 = enable

There are three entries in this field as follows: Fire, Burglary/Audible Panic,

Silent Panic/Duress.

If enabled, causes the control to send periodic short pulses on the J2 radio

triggers to the LRR. The LRR uses these pulses to determine that its

connection to the control is still intact.

Must be 1 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

2*22 Display Fire Alarms of Other

Partitions (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows fire alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed at

this partition’s keypad(s).

2*23 Display Burglary & Panic Alarms

for Other Partitions (partition-

specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows burglary and panic alarms that occur on other partitions to

be displayed at this partition’s keypad(s).

2*24 Display Troubles of Other

Partitions (partition-specific)

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, allows troubles that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this

partition’s keypad(s).

2*30 Pager Installed

0 = disable

1 = enable

Enable if the Alphanumeric Pager Module (VA8201) interface is installed.

NOTE: The APM is needed for alphanumeric type paging and/or printing to a

parallel printer.

2*31 Delay Paging

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has eight locations, one for each pager. If enabled, the system waits

the delay time specified in field 2*32 before transmitting the message after the

dialer completes sending the message.

2*32 Time to Delay Pager After Dialer

000-024 times 10 seconds (010-240).

This delay should be set to allow enough time for the central station to call

back the premises in order to verify an alarm condition. Field 2*31 must be

enabled.

2*33 Pager 1 Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 1. Enter up to 17 digits. Do

not fill unused spaces.

2*34 Pager 1 ID Number

Enter 0-9

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 1. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*35 Pager 1 Format

0 = numeric

1 = ID

2 = alphanumeric

Enter the pager format for Pager 1.

2*36 Pager 1 Delay 1

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is

sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*37 Pager 1 Delay 2

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information

is sent.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

5-14

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

2*38 Pager 1 Partition Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system

sends messages to Pager 1 for the partition(s).

2*39 Pager 1 Trigger Event Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, Test.

If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.

2*40 Pager 2 Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 2. Enter up to 17 digits. Do

not fill unused spaces.

2*41 Pager 2 ID Number

Enter 0-9

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 2. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*42 Pager 2 Format

0 = numeric

1 = ID

2 = alphanumeric

Enter the pager format for Pager 2.

2*43 Pager 2 Delay 1

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is

sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*44 Pager 2 Delay 2

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information

is sent.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*45 Pager 2 Partition Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system

sends messages to Pager 2 for the partition(s).

2*46 Pager 2 Trigger Event Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, Test.

If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.

2*47 Pager 3 Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 3. Enter up to 17 digits. Do

not fill unused spaces.

2*48 Pager 3 ID Number

Enter 0-9

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 3. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*49 Pager 3 Format

0 = numeric

1 = ID

2 = alphanumeric

Enter the pager format for Pager 3.

2*50 Pager 3 Delay 1

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is

sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*51 Pager 3 Delay 2

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information

is sent.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*52 Pager 3 Partition Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system

sends messages to Pager 3 for the partition(s).

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-15

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

2*53 Pager 3 Trigger Event Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, Test.

If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.

2*54 Pager 4 Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 4. Enter up to 17 digits. Do

not fill unused spaces.

2*55 Pager 4 ID Number

Enter 0-9

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 4. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*56 Pager 4 Format

0 = numeric

1 = ID

2 = alphanumeric

Enter the pager format for Pager 4.

2*57 Pager 4 Delay 1

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is

sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*58 Pager 4 Delay 2

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information

is sent.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*59 Pager 4 Partition Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system

sends messages to Pager 4 for the partition(s).

2*60 Pager 4 Trigger Event Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, Test.

If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.

2*61 Pager 5 Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 5. Enter up to 17 digits. Do

not fill unused spaces.

2*62 Pager 5 ID Number

Enter 0-9

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 5. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*63 Pager 5 Format

0 = numeric

1 = ID

2 = alphanumeric

Enter the pager format for Pager 5.

2*64 Pager 5 Delay 1

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is

sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*65 Pager 5 Delay 2

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information

is sent.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*66 Pager 5 Partition Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system

sends messages to Pager 5 for the partition(s).

2*67 Pager 5 Trigger Event Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, Test.

If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

5-16

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

2*68 Pager 6 Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 6. Enter up to 17 digits. Do

not fill unused spaces.

2*69 Pager 6 ID Number

Enter 0-9

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 6. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*70 Pager 6 Format

0 = numeric

1 = ID

2 = alphanumeric

Enter the pager format for Pager 6.

2*71 Pager 6 Delay 1

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is

sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*72 Pager 6 Delay 2

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information

is sent.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*73 Pager 6 Partition Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system

sends messages to Pager 6 for the partition(s).

2*74 Pager 6 Trigger Event Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, Test.

If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.

2*75 Pager 7 Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 7. Enter up to 17 digits. Do

not fill unused spaces.

2*76 Pager 7 ID Number

Enter 0-9

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 7. Enter up to 10 digits.

2*77 Pager 7 Format

0 = numeric

1 = ID

2 = alphanumeric

Enter the pager format for Pager 7.

2*78 Pager 7 Delay 1

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is

sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*79 Pager 7 Delay 2

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information

is sent.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*80 Pager 7 Partition Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system

sends messages to Pager 7 for the partition(s).

2*81 Pager 7 Trigger Event Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, Test.

If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.

2*82 Pager 8 Phone Number

Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-

second pause.

Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 8. Enter up to 17 digits. Do

not fill unused spaces.

2*83 Pager 8 ID Number

Enter 0-9

Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 8. Enter up to 10 digits.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-17

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

2*84 Pager 8 Format

0 = numeric

1 = ID

2 = alphanumeric

Enter the pager format for Pager 8.

2*85 Pager 8 Delay 1

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager ID is

sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*86 Pager 8 Delay 2

000-060 seconds.

This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event information

is sent.

NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.

2*87 Pager 8 Partition Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system

sends messages to Pager 8 for the partition(s).

2*88 Pager 8 Trigger Event Enables

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,

System, Test.

If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.

3*00 Check or TRBL Display

0 = CHECK

1 = TRBL

Select whether the system should display CHECK or TRBL when a trouble

condition occurs.

3*01 Fire Display Lock

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system locks the display on the first fire alarm. Press ✳ to

display the next fire alarm in the system. If disabled, the system scrolls all

alarms automatically.

3*12 Zone Type 18 Delay Use

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, use the delay time programmed in field 3✳16.

3*13 Supervisory on Open and Short

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system produces a supervisory response on an open or short

circuit. If disabled, a short circuit produces a supervisory response and an

open produces a trouble response.

3*14 Waterflow Alarm Silence Option

0 = silenced by User Code + OFF

1 = silenced when zone restores

Select how the Waterflow zone type will be silenced.

NOTE: This feature may be set to 1 only by permission of the local authority.

3*15 Alarm Sounds Bell 1 & 2

0 = pulsing

1 = steady

This field has two entries, one for each Notification Appliance Circuits. If set

for pulsing, field ✳08 applies.

3*16 Zone Types 17 & 18 Delay

Enter 01-15 times 2 seconds

Enter 00 for no delay

Select the delay time for zone types 17 and 18. The zone must be faulted for

entire delay time before an alarm or supervisory condition occurs. This may

prevent alarms due to minor fluctuations in waterflow.

3*17 Zone 6 Alternate Function Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, zone 6 may be used as a tamper zone (bell and cabinet tampers).

3*18 Extended Delay for Zone Types

17 & 18

0 = no extended delay

1 = multiply delay by 4

This option allows the delay programmed in field 3✳16 for Waterflow and

Supervisory zones to be extended by 4 times.

UL For Waterflow alarms, total maximum allowable time delay (device and panel) is 90 seconds.

For Fire Supervisory signals, total maximum allowable time delay (device and panel) is 200 seconds.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

5-18

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

3*19 Auxiliary Input Alternate

Function Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, pins 5 and 9 on the J2 connector function as RS232 output and

input, respectively. If disabled, they function as fire alarm trigger and LRR

Xmit Okay. See the chart at field 3*20 for the J2 trigger configurations.

NOTE: If field 3*19 is enabled, you cannot use a LRR connected to the J2 trigger.

3*20 Trigger Outputs Function

Selection

0 = remote keypad sounder

1 = keyswitch LEDs

2 = 5140LED connection

Select the function of the J2 trigger outputs. See chart below.

J2 Pin Field 3*19 = 0

Field3*20 = 0 Field 3*19 = 0

Field3*20 = 1 Field 3*19 = 0

Field3*20 = 2 Field 3*19 = 1

1 Panic Alarm Panic Alarm 5140LED Dialer 1 Fail

LED As selected in field 3*20

2 Trouble Trouble Trouble As selected in field 3*20

3 Burglary Alarm Burglary Alarm 5140LED COMM Fail

LED As selected in field 3*20

4 Fire Supervisory Fire Supervisory Fire Supervisory As selected in field 3*20

5 Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Fire Alarm RS232 Output

6Remote Console

Sounder Keyswitch Ready LED 5140LED Dialer 2 Fail

LED As selected in field 3*20

7 Open/Close Keyswitch Armed LED 5140LED AC Fail LED As selected in field 3*20

8 Ground Ground Ground Ground

9 LRR Xmit Okay LRR Xmit Okay LRR Xmit Okay RS232 Input

3*21 Maximum Number of Dialer

Attempts

Enter the number of dialing attempts 1-8.

Select the maximum number of dialer attempts for the system.

NOTE: Must be 3, 4, or 5 for NFPA 72 compliant systems if a secondary

phone number is programmed.

3*30 Dialer Selection

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has two entries, one for each dialer (main and backup). Enter 1 if the

dialer is being used.

3*31 Backup Dialer TouchTone or

Rotary

0 = rotary

1 = touchtone

Select the dialing method for the backup dialer.

3*50 Zone Type Restore Enables for

Types 16-18

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has three entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that

will send Restore reports.

Must be 1 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.

3*55 Reset on Second OFF for Bell 1

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system resets bell 1 output when the second User Code +

OFF Code is entered after a fire alarm. If disabled, the system resets bell 1

output after the first User Code + OFF.

3*56 Reset on Second OFF for Bell 2

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, the system resets bell 2 output when the second User Code +

OFF Code is entered after a fire alarm. If disabled, the system resets bell 2

output after the first User Code + OFF.

3*57 Confirmation of Arming Ding Bell

2 & Auxiliary Relay

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay. If

enabled, produces ½-second external alarm sounding (“ding”) at the end of

exit delay (or after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing reports).

Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations.

Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions

5-19

FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION

3*59 Enable Bell 2 & Auxiliary Relay

Chime Annunciation

0 = disable

1 = enable

This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay. If

enabled, the system produces chime annunciation on the output.

3*60 Bell 2 & Auxiliary Relay Timeout

Enter 01-15 multiplied by 2 minutes.

00 = no timeout.

This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay.

Defines the length of time the output and the keypad’s sounder will sound for

all audible alarms.

Must be a minimum of 16 minutes for UL commercial burglary installations

and a minimum 6 minutes for UL commercial fire installations.

3*61 Auxiliary Relay Function

Selection

0 = trouble/supervisory

1 = alarm, silenced by User Code + OFF

2 = smoke detector reset

3 = battery save

4 = alarm, silenced by User Code + # + 67

Select the condition that will trigger the auxiliary relay.

NOTES:

Smoke detector reset triggers the relay momentarily (approximately 6

seconds) on the second User Code + OFF entry.

Battery save is used to disconnect power from non-critical loads 4 hours after

AC loss.

3*82 Burglary Features on Partition 1

Enable

0 = disable

1 = enable

If enabled, arming, test and chime modes can be used on partition 1.

NOTE: These features are automatically enabled on all other partitions.

3*85 System Zone Bypass Inhibit

0 = prevent bypass

1 = allow only installer to bypass

2 = allow only installer and master codes to

bypass

Select which codes, if any, can bypass fire zones and systems zones.

NOTES:

This applies to fire zones programmed with zone types 9, 16, 17, and 18 and

system zones 970-977.

The bypassing can only be done from partition 1.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

5-20

6-1

SECTION 6

Scheduling Options

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

UL• You must program Bypass and Auto-Arm Fail reports for UL installations.

• Auto-disarming is not permitted in UL installations.

• You must not program Random Scheduling of Time Driven Events for UL installations.

General

The scheduling features allow certain operations to be

automated, such as arming, disarming, bypassing of

zones, and activating relay outputs.

The system uses time windows (a programmed period of

time with a start and stop time) for defining open/close

schedules, holiday schedules, user-defined temporary

schedules, and access schedules for users.

Scheduled events are programmed by user-friendly

menu modes of programming (#80, #81, #83, and #93

modes), explained in detail in this section. These menus

take you step by step through the options.

Auto Arming

The system can automatically arm (AWAY Mode) a

partition at the end of a pre-determined closing

(arming) time window.

Auto Arming can be delayed three ways: by use of the

Auto-Arm Delay, the Auto-Arm Warning, or by

manually extending the closing (arming) time window

with a keypad command.

The system can also automatically bypass any open

zones when auto arming.

Auto-Arm Delay

Auto-Arm Delay provides a delay (grace period) before

auto arming. It starts at the end of the closing time

window.

The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56

minutes in partition-specific program field 2*05. At the

expiration of this delay, the Auto-Arm Warning will

start.

Auto-Arm Warning

The Auto-Arm Warning causes the keypad sounder to

warn the user of an impending Auto-Arm.

The warning can be set from 1 to 15 minutes prior to

the arming in partition-specific program field 2*06.

During this period the keypad beeps every 15 seconds

and displays “AUTO ARM ALERT.” During the last 60

seconds, the keypads beep every 5 seconds.

The panel arms at the conclusion of the Auto-Arm

Warning period.

Extend Closing Window

A user can manually delay the arm (closing) time

window by 1 or 2 hours. This is done by entering a

keypad command (User Code + #82), which then

prompts the user to enter the desired extension time of

1 or 2.

This feature is useful if a user must stay on the

premises later than usual.

The Auto-Arm delay and warning periods begin at the

end of the extension.

Force Arm

The Force Arm option causes the panel to attempt to

bypass any faulted zones prior to auto arming (panel

performs a force-arm).

This option is set in partition-specific program field

2*08.

Auto Disarming

The system can automatically disarm a partition at the

end of a pre-determined opening (disarm) time window.

The disarming time can be delayed by using the Auto-

Disarm Delay feature.

Disarm Delay

Auto-Disarm Delay provides a delay before auto

disarming. This delay is added to the end of the disarm

time window.

The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56

minutes, in partition-specific program field 2*07.

Restrict Disarming

This option allows disarming by users only during the

disarm time window and during the arming time

window (in case user needs to re-enter premises after

manually arming the partition).

This option is set in partition-specific field 2*10. If field

2*10 is set, we highly recommend setting field 2*11, as

well. This field allows the partition to be disarmed

outside the arm/disarm time windows only if the

partition is in alarm.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

6-2

Exception Reports

This option allows the reporting of openings and

closings to the central station only if the arming and

disarming occurs outside of the predetermined opening

and closing time windows. It is set in partition-specific

field 2*09.

The system can be programmed to send Failed to Open

and Failed to Close reports if the partition is not armed

or disarmed by the end of the corresponding time

window.

Limitation of Access of Users by Time

A user’s access to the system can be limited to a certain

time period. Outside this time, that user’s code is

inactive. The system provides up to 8 access schedules,

each consisting of two time windows (typically one for

opening, one for closing) for each day of the week and

two time windows for holidays.

The access schedules are programmed in the #80 Menu

Mode, and enabled when a user’s access code is added

to the system.

If a user tries to operate the system outside the

schedule, the alpha keypad displays “Access Denied.”

Time-Driven Events

The system can automatically activate and de-activate

relays at predetermined times to turn lights or other

devices on and off. The Time-Driven events can be

activated at different times in relation to a time

window:

• At the beginning of a time window

• At the end of a time window

• During a time window (on at beginning of window,

off at end)

• At both the beginning and end of the time window

(e.g., to sound a buzzer at the beginning and end of a

coffee break)

• Random time at the start of the time window (occurs

within 30 minutes after the start of the time

window)

• Random time at the end of the time window (occurs

within 30 minutes after the end of the time window)

• Random during the time window (begins within 30

minutes after the start of the time window and ends

within 30 minutes after the end of the time window)

The system can perform the same actions on a daily

basis, or can perform an action only once (e.g., turn on

the porch light this Wednesday at 8:00 PM).

The system also provides up to 20 programmable

“timers” available to the end user for the purpose of

activating output devices at preset times and days.

Time Window Definitions

Scheduled events are based on time windows, (periods

of time) during which an event may take place. The

system supports up to 20 time windows, each defined by

a “Start” time and a “Stop” time.

The windows are shared by all 8 partitions, and are

used when programming the various schedules

(open/close, limitation of access), as well as for Time-

Driven event control.

Scheduling Example

A store that has the following hours:

Monday to Friday 9am to 6pm

Saturday 10am to 4pm

Sunday Closed

Holidays Closed

The owner desires the following time windows to allow

time for employees to arm or disarm the system:

Monday to Friday Open (disarm) 8am to 9am

Close (arm) 6pm to 6:30pm

Saturday Open (disarm) 9am to 10am

Close (arm) 4pm to 4:30pm

Sunday & Holidays Closed

For this schedule, the four time windows need to be

programmed:

Window Start Stop Purpose

1 8am 9am Monday-Friday open window

2 9am 10am Saturday open window

3 4pm 4:30pm Saturday close window

4 6pm 6:30pm Monday-Fri. close window

Using the #80 Menu Mode, the installer can program

open/close schedules by assigning a time window to a

day of the week (windows are entered as 2-digit entries)

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Hol

Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl

01/04 01/04 01/04 01/04 01/05 02/03 00/00 00/00

NOTE: 00 is entered for those days on which the store

is closed.

Employees can arm and disarm the system, when

programmed, within the open and close time windows

without causing a report to be sent to the central

station (reporting by exception, field 2*09). The system

can be programmed to automatically arm/disarm in

case an employee fails to arm/disarm manually (auto-

arm/auto-disarm).

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-3

Open/Close Schedules Definitions

General

The open/close scheduling is controlled by one of three

schedules. Each schedule consists of one time window

for openings and one time window for closings.

There are three types of schedules available: Daily,

Holiday, and Temporary.

Daily Schedule

Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of

one opening window and one closing window per day.

Holiday Schedule

A holiday schedule overrides the regular daily schedule

on selected holidays throughout the year.

The opening and closing windows are programmed in

the daily schedule, but the holidays themselves are

defined in Holiday Schedule Programming in the #80

Menu Mode.

Temporary Schedule

The temporary schedule provides a method for the end

user to override the daily and holiday schedules. It

consists of one opening window and one closing window

for each day of the week. The schedule takes effect for

up to one week, after which it is automatically

deactivated.

This schedule is programmed using the #81 Temporary

Schedule Menu Mode.

Additional Schedules

Additional opening and closing schedules can be

programmed using the Time-Driven Event

Programming. For example, a schedule for normal

store openings/closings can be programmed with a daily

open/close schedule, and another open/close schedule for

a lunch hour can be programmed using the Time-

Driven event schedule programming.

Refer to “Time-Driven Events” later in this section for

detailed information.

Open/Close Reports by Exception

The system can help reduce communication traffic to

the central station by using the Open/Close Reports by

Exception feature. The Open/Close by Exception option

suppresses these reports from being sent to the central

station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected

time window. Reports are only sent if the arm or

disarm occurs outside the assigned time window.

The system keeps a record of all openings/closings in

its event log.

If a disarming occurs during a closing window (for

example, a person who arms the system forgets

something and has to re-enter), the Opening report

(although outside of the opening window) will not be

sent (as long as that disarming occurs within the

closing window).

This option is programmed in partition-specific program

field 2*09.

Example of Open/Close Exception Reporting & Scheduling

The following chart gives an example of how the Open/Close by Exception reporting works.

6:01PM 5:59AM 6AM 9AM 9:01AM 3:59PM 4PM 6PM 6:01PM 5:59AM

Early Opening reports are

sent if system is manually

disarmed before opening

window begins.

Early and Late Opening

and Closing reports are

programmable options

in Report Code

Programming in the

Programming Guide

They are not dependent

on the programming of

the Exception

Reporting option.

Opening Window

No reports are sent if

system is disarmed

during this time

window.

If an arming occurs,

a Closing report is

sent to the central

station regardless of

how the Exception

Reporting option is

set.

Auto-disarm delay begins.

Auto-disarm occurs after delay (if

auto-disarm is enabled).

Missed Opening reports are sent

if manual disarming has not

occurred at expiration of opening

window.

Late Opening reports are sent if

disarm occurs after the opening

window expires.

Early Closing reports are sent if

manual arming occurs before the

closing window begins.

Missed Opening/Closing type

reports are programmed in

Report Code Programming in

the

Programming Guide

. The

Exception Reporting option

must be set for these to be

sent.

Closing Window

No reports are sent

if system is armed*

during this time

window.

* or disarmed if

user needs to re-

enter premises.

Auto-arm delay begins.

Auto-arm warning begins.

Auto-arm occurs after

warning expires (if auto-

arm is enabled).

Missed Closing reports are

sent if manual arming has

not occurred at expiration

of closing window.

Late Closing reports are

sent if system is manually

armed after the closing

window expires.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

6-4

Scheduling Menu Mode

The #80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to program

most of the scheduling and timed-event options. Enter

Installer Code + [#] + [8] + [0] from the normal

operating mode. NOTE: Only users with an Installer or

Master level user code may enter the #80 mode.

The following can be programmed while in this mode:

• time windows

• open/close schedules to each partition

• holiday schedules

• Time-Driven events (for system functions and relay

activation)

• limitation of access schedules

Some scheduling features are programmed in Data

Field Programming Mode (Installer Code + 8 0 0 0).

Some features are programmed in the #93 Menu Mode.

The programming scheduling fields are listed below.

System-Wide Fields:

*04 Enable Random Timers

1*74 –1*75 Relay timeout values

2*01-2*02 Daylight saving time options

2*11 Allow disarming outside window if alarm

occurs

Partition-Specific fields:

1*76 Access control relay for this partition

2*05 Auto-arm delay value

2*06 Auto-arm warning time

2*07 Auto-disarm delay value

2*08 Force-arm enable

2*09 Open/Close Reporting by Exception

2*10 Restrict disarm only during windows

#93 Menu Mode (System Group #3)

Scheduling related report codes

Event-driven options are programmed using Output

Programming in #93 Menu Mode. Relay activation can

also be Time-Driven and that those are programmed

using the #80 Menu Mode. Refer to the Time-Driven

Event Programming later in this section for the

procedure.

Steps to Program Scheduling Options

This section contains examples of the

worksheets only. For complete worksheets,

see the

Programming Guide

accompanying this

Installation and Setup Guide.

In order to use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode, use the

worksheets to do the following:

1. Define time windows (up to 20)

2. Define the daily open/close schedules (one schedule

per day, per partition)

3. Define the holidays to be used by the system (up to

16)

4. Define limitation of access times (up to 8 schedules)

5. Define the Time-Driven events (up to 20)

NOTE: Temporary schedules are programmed using

#81 Menu Mode.

Use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode to perform the

following functions:

6. Program the time windows

7. Program the open/close schedules

8. Program the Time-Driven events

9. Program the access schedules

Scheduling Menu Structure

To program schedules, enter Scheduling Program Mode:

Installer Code + [#] + [80]. (Installer or Master level

user code.)

Scheduling Program Mode can be entered only

when all partitions are disarmed.

There are 6 procedures of scheduling menus accessed via #80, as shown below. Entering 1 at a displayed main menu

prompt selects that menu procedure. Prompts for programming that scheduling feature then appear. Enter 0 to skip a

procedure and display the next menu option.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Time Window ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Upon entering Schedule Menu Mode, this prompt appears. Enter 1 to program time windows. Refer to

Time

Windows Programming

later in this section for detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “O/C Schedules?” prompt.

O/C Schedules ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules. Refer to

Open/Close Schedules Programming

later in

this section for detailed procedures.

Enter 0to move to the “Holidays?” prompt.

Holidays ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program holiday schedules. Refer to

Holiday Schedule Programming

later in this section for

detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “Timed Events?” prompt.

Timed Events ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program timed events for relay outputs, additional schedules, and other system functions. Refer

Time-Driven Event Programming

later in this section for detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “Access Sched?” prompt.

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-5

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Access Sched. ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program access schedules. Refer to

Limitation of Access Schedules Programming

later in this

section for detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “Quit?” prompt.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to quit

#80 Scheduling Menu Mode

and return to normal operating mode.

Enter 0 to make any changes or review the scheduling programming options. If you press 0, the “Time

Window?” prompt is displayed.

Time Windows

The system provides 20 time windows that are defined

with start and stop times. These windows are used for

various open/close and access schedules, as well as for

output controls, and are the basis of the scheduling

system. These windows are shared among all 8

partitions.

Time Windows Worksheet

The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet

found in the Programming Guide. This worksheet will

help you define time windows and scheduling aspects of

this system before you program them. Note that time

windows can span midnight; for example, from 11 PM

to 1 AM.

Time Window

Number Start Time

(HH:MM) Stop Time

(HH:MM)

3…..20

A time window must have a start and a stop time.

Time Windows Programming

Enter Scheduling Mode by entering Installer Code +

[#] + [80]. The keypad displays the Time Window

Programming prompt.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Time Window ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to program time windows.

Time Window # ?

01-20, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the 2-digit time window number (01-20) to be programmed.

Press [✳] to accept the entry. Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Time Window #?” prompt to quit time window

programming and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

01 TIME WINDOW

00:00AM 00:00AM

If you entered a time window number, the cursor is now positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start of

window entry.

Enter the desired start of window hour and press [✳]. The cursor moves to the minutes position. Enter the

desired minutes and press [✳]. Toggle the AM/PM indication by pressing any key 0-9 while the cursor is

under the A/P position and then press [✳]. Repeat this to program the stop of window entry.

When the entry is completed, the “Time Window #?” prompt is displayed again.

Enter the next time window number to be programmed and repeat the procedure.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Because the time windows are shared among all partitions, it is important to make sure that changing a

time window does not adversely affect desired actions in other partitions.

Daily Open/Close Schedules

Each partition can be assigned one daily open/close

schedule, plus a holiday schedule. Temporary

schedules are programmed separately, using the #81

Temporary Schedule Menu Mode. To program

additional open/close schedules, see Time-Driven Events

Programming later in this section for the procedure.

Open/Close Schedule Worksheet

The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet

found in the Programming Guide. Write the previously

defined time window numbers for open and close for

each partition.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

6-6

Part Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat Sun Hol

Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl

3…8

Open/Close Schedule Programming

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until the “O/C Schedules?” prompt appears.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

O/C Schedules ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules.

Partition # ?

01-08, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the appropriate partition number for which the following open/close schedules will apply.

Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Partition #?” prompt to quit open/close schedules programming and display the “Quit

?” prompt.

Mon P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the time window number 01-20 for the displayed day’s opening schedule beginning with Monday.

Enter 00 if no schedule is desired for a particular day. As the number is keyed in, the actual time that has

been stored for that window number is displayed as a programming aid.

Press [✳] to accept the entry.

Mon P1 CL WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the time window number for the displayed day’s closing schedule. As the number is keyed in, the

actual time that has been stored for the window number is displayed.

Press the [✳] key to accept the entry.

Tue P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

The keypad now prompts for Tuesday’s open/close schedule. Follow the procedure for Monday’s prompts.

When the last day of the week has been programmed, the holiday opening and closing window prompts are

displayed.

Hol P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

Repeat the procedure for the holiday opening and closing time windows.

Press the [✳] key to accept the entry.

When the entries are completed, the “Partition #?” prompt is displayed again. Repeat this procedure for

each partition in the system.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Holiday Schedules

A holiday schedule overrides the regular daily open/close schedule on the programmed holidays throughout the year.

The system provides up to 16 holidays that can be assigned for the system. Each holiday can be assigned to any

combination of partitions. List the desired holidays in a Month/Day format on the worksheet. Check the partitions for

which these holidays apply.

Holiday Schedule Worksheet

The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet found in the Programming Guide.

HOL Partition

Month/Day 12345678

3…16

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-7

Holiday Schedule Programming

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until the “Holidays ?” prompt appears.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Holidays ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program holiday schedules.

HOLIDAY NUMBER ?

01-16,00=Quit 01

Enter the 2-digit holiday number (01-16) to be programmed and press [✳] to accept entry.

Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Holiday Number?” prompt to quit the holiday menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

01 ENTER DATE

00/00

The cursor is now positioned on the tens of months digit. Enter the appropriate month, then press [✳] to

proceed to the day field.

Enter the appropriate day for the holiday.

Press [✳] to accept the entry.

Part ? 12345678

Hit 0-8 x x

Holidays can be set for any partition, as follows. Press [0] to turn all partitions on or off, or use keys 1-8 to

toggle the letter “x” under the partition to which this holiday will apply.

Press the [✳] key when all desired partitions have been assigned.

The “Holiday Number?” prompt is displayed again. Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be

programmed.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Time-Driven Events

These schedules are used to activate outputs, bypass

zones, etc. based on time. There are 20 of these

schedules that may be programmed for the system,

each governed by the previously defined time windows.

The actions that can be programmed to automatically

activate at set times are: relay commands, arm/disarm

commands, zone bypassing commands, and open/close

access conditions.

Time-Driven Events Worksheet

The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet

found in the Programming Guide. Fill out the

worksheet using the steps outlined below.

Automatic Refresh Feature

The system automatically updates the status of all

Time-Driven Events upon any of the following

occurrences:

• Changing of the time or date via #63 mode

• Exiting #80 Scheduling Menu mode

• Exiting Program mode

• After a disconnect from the downloader

• On a power-up

• At Daylight Saving Time adjustment.

Sched Time Days Action Action Activation

Num. Window M T W T F S S H Desired Specifier Time

3…20

1. Enter the schedule number (01-20) and time

window number (01-20), and note the day of the

week the action is desired.

2. Enter the code for the desired action and

action specifier. The action codes represent the

events that are to take place when the scheduled

time is reached. Each action also requires an

action specifier, which defines what the action will

affect (relay, relay group, partition, zone list, user

group). The action specifier varies, depending on

the type of action selected.

The following is a list of the Action Codes (desired

actions) used when programming Time-Driven events.

Note that these codes are independent of the relay

codes programmed during Output Programming in the

#93 Menu Mode.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

6-8

Relay Commands

Action Code Action Action Specifier

01 Relay On Relay #

02 Relay Off Relay #

03 Relay Close for 2 seconds Relay #

04 Relay Close XX minutes (set

in field 1*74) Relay #

05 Relay Close YY seconds (set

in field 1*75) Relay #

06 Relay Group On Relay Group #

07 Relay Group Off Relay Group #

08 Relay Group Close for 2

seconds Relay Group #

09 Relay Group Close XX

minutes (set in field 1*74) Relay Group #

10 Relay Group Close YY

seconds (set in field 1*75) Relay Group #

Arm/Disarm Commands

Action Code Action Action Specifier

20 Arm-STAY Partition(s)

21 Arm AWAY Partition(s)

22 Disarm Partition(s)

23 Force Arm STAY (Auto-

bypass faulted zns) Partition(s)

24 Force Arm AWAY (Auto-

bypass faulted zns) Partition(s)

25 Arm INSTANT Partition(s)

26 Arm MAXIMUM Partition(s)

• The auto-arm warning (field 2*06) applies

when using Time-Driven events to auto-arm.

• Temporary schedules do not override an

auto-arming or auto-disarming programmed

in Time-Driven events.

• The auto-arming window cannot be extended

using the Installer Code + #82 Mode.

Bypass Commands

Action Code Action Action Specifier

30 Auto bypass – Zone list Zone list #

31 Auto unbypass – Zone list Zone list #

Open/Close Windows

Action Code Action Action Specifier

40 Enable Opening Window by

partition Partition(s)

41 Enable Closing Window by

partition Partition(s)

42 Enable Access Window for

access group Access Group

50 Off-Normal Reminder

(starts local keypad beeping if

fire or system trouble

condition exists)

None

Access Control Commands

Action Code Action Action Specifier

55 Access Point Grant Access Point #

56 Access Point Grant with

Override Access Point #

Action Code Action Action Specifier

57 Access Point Protect Access Point #

58 Access Point Bypass Access Point #

59 Access Point Lock Access Point #

60 Access Point Exit Access Point #

61 Access Point Group Grant Group #

62 Access Point Group Grant

with Override Group #

63 Access Point Group Protect Group #

64 Access Point Group Bypass Group #

65 Access Point Group Lock Group #

66 Access Point Group Exit Group #

67 Access Point Partition Grant Partition #

68 Access Point Partition Grant

with Override Partition #

69 Access Point Protect by

Partition Partition #

70 Access Point Bypass by

Partition Partition #

71 Access Point Lock by

Partition Partition #

72 Access Point Exit by Partition Partition #

73 Access Point Trigger On Trigger #

74 Access Point Trigger Off Trigger #

77 Access Point Group Enable Group #

78 Access Point Group Disable Group #

3. Enter the desired activation time (when the

action is to take place). Select from:

Activation

Time Description

1 Beginning of time window.

2 End of time window.

3During time window active period only (on at

beginning of window, off at end).

For example, if bypass is selected to activate during

the window, zones in a zone list are bypassed at the

beginning of the window and unbypassed at the end

of the window.

4Beginning and end of time window (e.g., a coffee

break buzzer). In this example, if relay pulse is

selected, the relay pulses for 2 seconds at the

beginning of the window, signaling the beginning of

the coffee break. At the end of the window it pulses

again, signaling the end of coffee break.

5Random time at the start of the time window (occurs

within 30 minutes after the start of the time window).

NOTE: Since the randomization for choice “5”

occurs within 30 minutes after the start of the

window, the time window must be of a duration of at

least 30 minutes.

6Random time at the end of the time window (occurs

within 30 minutes after the end of the time window).

7Random during the time window (begins within 30

minutes after the start of the time window and ends

within 30 minutes after the end of the time window).

NOTE: Since the randomization for choice “7”

occurs within 30 minutes after the start of the

window, the time window must be of a duration of at

least 30 minutes.

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-9

Field *04 must be enabled for randomization. A user

must initiate a random schedule by entering one of the

following sequences:

• [User Code] + [#] + [41]. This will randomize, up

to 30 minutes, the activation time of all devices,

programmed for randomization, assigned to the

partition the sequence is entered in. Enter the

sequence again to turn off the random schedule.

• [User Code] + [#] + [42]. This is the same as the

method above, except the randomization occurs

only on devices with activation times within 6 PM

and 5 AM. Enter the same sequence again to turn

off the random schedule.

ULYou must not program Random Scheduling of

Time Driven Events for UL installations.

Time-Driven Event Programming

The following menu items must first be programmed in

Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode:

Enter Relay No. (reference identification number)

Output Group (if applicable)

Restriction

Output Type (V-Plex, 4204/4204CF, or FSA)

Zone No. (V-Plex)

ECP Address (4204/4204CF or FSA)

Relay No. (4204/4204CF)

LED No. (FSA)

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until

the “Timed Events ?” prompt appears.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Timed Events ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program timed events.

TIMED EVENT # ?

01-20, 00=Quit 01

Enter the timed event number to be programmed (01-20).

Press [✳].

The system then prompts the user to enter the desired action to be taken.

Enter 00 at the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt to quit the timed event menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

01 ACTION ?

none 00

Enter the action code for this timed-event number from the list at the left. This could be an output command,

an arming command, or any other Time-Driven event.

Press [✳] to accept the entry. The prompt for the action specifier appears.

ACTION CODES EXPLANATION ACTION SPECIFIER

01=Relay On

02=Relay Off

03=Relay Close for 2 seconds

04=Relay Close XX minutes

05=Relay Close YY seconds

Actions 01-05

If you selected actions 01-05, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the relay

number.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

01 RELAY # ?

06=Relay Group On

07=Relay Group Off

08=Relay Group Close for 2

seconds

09=Relay Group Close XX

minutes

10=Relay Group Close YY

seconds

Actions 06-10

If you selected actions 06-10, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the relay

group number.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

01 RELAY GRP # ?

20=Arm-STAY

21=Arm AWAY

22=Disarm

23=Force Arm STAY

24=Force Arm AWAY

25=Arm INSTANT

26=Arm MAXIMUM

40=Enable Open Window by

Part.

41=Enable Close Window by

Part.

Actions 21-26 and 40-41

If you selected actions 21-26 or 40-41, the prompt at the right appears. Enter

the partition to which the action applies. Enter 0 to select all partitions. Enter

a partition number again to deselect it.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

PART? 12345678

HIT 0-8 X X

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

6-10

ACTION CODES EXPLANATION ACTION SPECIFIER

30=Auto bypass – Zone list

31=Auto unbypass – Zone list

Actions 30-31

If you selected actions 30-31, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the zone

list number that contains the zones to be bypassed or unbypassed.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

01 ZONE LIST ?

ENTER 01-15 01

42=Enable Access Window for

Access group(s) Action 42

If you selected action 42, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the group

number to which the time window will apply.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

GROUP ? 12345678

HIT 0-8 X

50=Off-Normal Reminder Action 50

No action specifier is required for this action since the condition that this

occurs for are system-wide.

55=Access Point Grant

56=Access Point Grant

w/Override

57=Access Point Protect

58=Access Point Bypass

59=Access Point Lock

60=Access Point Exit

Actions 55-60

If you selected actions 55-60, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the

access point number.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

01 ACCESS POINT #

000

61=Access Point Group Grant

62=Access Point Group Grant

w/Override

63=Access Point Group

Protect

64=Access Point Group

Bypass

65=Access Point Group Lock

66=Access Point Group Exit

77=Access Point Group

Enable

78=Access Point Group

Disable

Actions 61-66 and 77-78

If you selected actions 61-66, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the

group number.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

01 GROUP #

67=Access Point Partition

Grant

68=Access Point Partition

Grant w/Override

69=Access Point Protect by

Partition

70=Access Point Bypass by

Partition

71=Access Point Lock by

Partition

72=Access Point Exit by

Partition

Actions 67-72

If you selected actions 67-72, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the

partition to which the action applies. Enter 0 to select all partitions. Enter a

partition number again to deselect it.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

PART? 12345678

HIT 0-8 X X

73=Access Point Trigger On

74=Access Point Trigger Off

Actions 73-74

If actions 73-74 were selected, the prompt at the right will be displayed. Enter

the trigger number.

Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.

01 TRIGGER #

PROMPT EXPLANATION

01 Time Window ?

00:00 00:00 01

Enter the time window number (01-20) for which this timed event is to occur. As the number is keyed in, the

actual time that has been stored for the time window number is displayed.

Press [✳] to accept entry.

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-11

PROMPT EXPLANATION

01 Active time ?

Enter the activation time from 1-10 (listed below). As the number is keyed in, the activation time is

displayed. The choices are:

1: Trigger at the start of the window.

2: Trigger at the end of the window.

3: Take effect only for the duration of the window.

4: Trigger at both the start and the end of the window. Example: coffee break buzzer.

5: Random trigger, up to 30 minutes, after the start of the window.

6: Random trigger, up to 30 minutes, after the end of the window.

7: Take effect only for the duration of the window, but random start and end the window up to 30 minutes.

Press [✳] to accept entry.

Days ? MTWTFSSH

Hit 0-8 x x

The system then asks for which days the event is to be activated.

Press 0 to toggle all days on or off; or press keys 1-8 to toggle the letter “x” under the day on or off (Monday

= 1, Holiday = H = 8).

When all entries have been made, the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt is displayed again.

Repeat the procedure for each timed event for the installation.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming. Enter 1 to quit

Scheduling Menu Mode.

Limitation of Access Schedules

Limitation of Access is a means by which a user’s access

code is limited to working during a certain period of

time. The system provides 8 Access Schedules, each of

which consists of two time windows for each day of the

week and two time windows for holidays (typically, one

for an opening time window and the second for a closing

time window). A user, required to follow a schedule,

would be assigned to an access group of the same

number (e.g., schedule 1= group 1).

The user’s access code is assigned to a group when that

user is added to the system. If no limitations apply,

enter 0.

Limitation of Access Schedule Worksheet

Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each access schedule.

Acc Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat Sun Hol

SchW1W2W1W2W1W2W1W2W1W2W1W2W1W2W1W2

3…8

NOTE: The holidays used for the access groups are the same as those defined in the holiday schedule.

Limitation of Access Schedules Programming

To program access schedules enter Scheduling Menu Mode Installer Code + # 80. After entering Scheduling Menu

Mode, press [0] until the “Access Sched. ?” prompt appears.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Access Sched. ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to program access schedules.

ACCESS SCHED # ?

01-08, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the access control schedule number between 01 and 08.

Press [✳] to accept entry.

Enter 00 at the “Access Sched #?” prompt to quit the access control menus and display the Quit ? prompt.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

6-12

PROMPT EXPLANATION

MON A1 Window 1?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the first time-window number (01-20) for this access schedule for the displayed day. As the number is

keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

MON A1 Window 2 ?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the second time-window number from 01-20 for this access schedule for the displayed day. As the

number is keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

TUE A1 Window 1?

00:00 00:00 00

Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week. When the last day of the week has been programmed,

the windows for holidays may be entered.

Hol A1 Window 1 ?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the first time-window number for holidays for this access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the

actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

Hol A1 Window 2 ?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the second time-window number for holidays for this access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the

actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Temporary Schedules

Each partition can be assigned a temporary schedule,

which overrides the regular open/close schedule (and

the holiday schedule). This schedule takes effect as

soon as it is programmed, and remains active for up to

one week.

Only users with the authority level of manager or

higher can program temporary schedules.

A temporary schedule affects only the partition from

which it is entered. Temporary schedules can also be

reused at later dates simply by scrolling (pressing [#])

to the “DAYS?” prompt and activating the appropriate

days. This should be considered when defining daily

time windows.

Temporary Schedule Worksheet

Partition/Windows Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

1Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

2…8 Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Section 6 – Scheduling Options

6-13

Temporary Schedules Programming

Enter User Code + [#] + 81 to enter this mode.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Mon DISARM WIND.

00:00AM 00:00AM

This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the disarm (opening) window for Monday.

Upon entry of this mode, the cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the disarm

window. Enter the desired hour.

Press [✳] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner.

Press [✳] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in the 0-9 range toggles the AM/PM indication.

Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.

Press [✳] to store the entries and move to the arming (closing) window for Monday.

Pressing [#] scrolls you through the prompts without making any changes.

Mon ARM WINDOW

00:00AM 00:00AM

This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the arm (closing) window for Monday.

The cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the arm window. Enter the hour.

Press [✳] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner.

Press [✳] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in the 0-9 range toggles the AM/PM indication.

Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.

After the windows for that day have been completed, the system prompts for disarm and arm time windows

for the next day.

Press [#] if no changes are desired.

Tue DISARM WIND.

00:00AM 00:00AM

Repeat the procedure described above for all days of the week.

When all the windows for all the days have been completed, the system prompts for which days of the

schedule are to be activated.

Days ? MTWTFSS

Hit 0-7 x x

This is the prompt that actually activates the temporary schedule.

To select the days to be activated, enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An “X” appears under that day, indicating the

temporary schedule for that day is active. Entering a day’s number again deactivates that day. Pressing 0

toggles all days on/off.

The temporary schedule is in effect only for the days highlighted with the letter “x” under them. As the week

progresses, the selected days are reset to the inactive state, but all other entries for the temporary schedule

remain programmed.

Press [✳] to store the entries or press [#] to exit the Temporary Schedule Entry Mode without making any

changes.

User Scheduling Menu Mode

The system provides up to 20 “timers” available to the end user to control output devices. The output devices themselves

are programmed into the system by the installer during Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode. The end user

needs only to know the output device number and its alpha descriptor.

The installer may set certain outputs to be “restricted” during Output Programming (this prevents the end user from

controlling doors, pumps, Notification Appliance Circuits, etc.)

To enter this mode, the user enters User Code + [#] + 83.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Output Timer # ?

01-20, 00=Quit 01

Enter the output timer number to be programmed (01-20). Press [✳] to accept entry and move to the next

prompt.

Enter 00 to quit and return to normal operating mode.

06 07:00P 11:45P

PORCH LITE 04

If that timer number has already been programmed, a summary screen appears. In this example:

06 = Timer #

07:00PM = Start Time

11:45PM = Stop Time

PORCH LITE = Descriptor for Output Device # 4

04 = Output Device # affected by this timer

Press [✳] to continue.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

6-14

PROMPT EXPLANATION

06 ENTER OUTPUT#

PORCH LITE 04

Enter the desired output number (01-96). As the number is entered, the descriptor for that output device is

displayed.

Press [✳] to continue.

Entering 00 as the output number deletes the timer (Timer 06, in this example) and displays an output

descriptor of “None.” Output devices are programmed via #93 Menu Mode.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

06 ON TIME ?

07:00 PM

The cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the ON time. Enter the desired hour. Press [✳] to move

to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. The AM/PM indication is toggled by

hitting any key from 0-9 while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.

Press [✳] to continue.

06 OFF TIME ?

11:45 PM

The cursor positioned on the tens of hours digit of the OFF time. Enter the desired hour. Press [✳] to move

to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. The AM/PM indication is toggled by

hitting any key in the 0-9 range while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.

Press [✳] to continue.

06 DAYS? MTWTFSS

HIT 0-7 x x

To select the days to be activated, enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An “x” appears under that day, indicating the

output for that day is active. Entering a day’s number again deactivates that day. Pressing 0 toggles all

days on/off.

The outputs are in effect only for the days highlighted with the letter “x” under them. As the week progresses,

the selected days are reset to the inactive state, unless the permanent option is selected (next screen

prompt).

When completed, press [✳] to continue.

06 Permanent ?

0 = NO,1 = YES 0

Selecting “Permanent” (1) means that this schedule will be in effect on a continuous basis. Selecting 0

means that this schedule will be in effect for one week only. The letter “x” under the day is then cleared, but

all other entries for the output device remain programmed.

Press [✳] to accept entry.

The system quits User Scheduling Mode and returns to normal operating mode.

7-1

SECTION 7

Downloading Primer

(Remote Downloading is not a UL Listed feature)

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

Downloading allows the operator to remotely access,

program, and control the security system over normal

telephone lines. Anything that can be done directly

from the keypad can be done remotely, using

ADEMCO’s COMPASS downloading software. To

communicate with the control panel, the following is

required:

1. IBM PC-compatible 486 33MHz PC or better with

100 MB of available hard disk space and at least

8MB of RAM (12MB is preferred). Windows 3.X,

Windows 95, 98, or Windows NT.

2. One of the following modems:

• ADEMCO CIA

• Hayes Smartmodem 1200 (external: level 1.2

or higher; internal: level 1.1 or higher)

• Hayes Optima 24 + Fax 96 external

• Hayes Optima 336

• BizComp Intellimodem 1200 w/volume

• BizComp Intellimodem 2400

Other brands are not compatible, even if claimed to

be 100% compatible.

3. COMPASS DOWNLOADING software available on

CD ROM with a complete User’s Manual. It may

also be downloaded from the ADEMCO web page.

The web address is http://www.ademco.com.

Internal modems must have a 4-position DIP

switch. Modems with a 6-position DIP switch

will not work.

Access Security

The following four levels of protection guard the control

against compromise while it is being accessed from a

remote location:

1. Security code handshake: The subscriber’s account

number as well as an 8-digit ID number (known

only to the office) must be matched between the

control and computer.

2. Hang-up and callback: The control panel “hangs

up” and calls the computer back at the pre-

programmed number only if the security codes

match.

3. Data encryption: All data that is exchanged

between the computer and control is encrypted to

reduce the possibility of anyone “tapping” the line

and corrupting data.

4. Operator access levels: Operators may be assigned

various levels of access to the downloader, each

having its own log-on code. The access levels allow

the operators read/write capabilities of the

customers’ account information. For a detailed

explanation of the access levels, see the

downloading software User Manual.

NOTES:

• Each time the control panel is accessed

successfully, a Callback Requested report is sent to

the central station, if Opening reports are

programmed.

• When the system is downloading, the keypad

displays “MODEM COMM.”

• After each download or save, an automatic time

stamp is done, to indicate the last download (or

save) and the operator ID number.

• A complete hard copy of each individual account

can be obtained by connecting a printer to the

computer. Refer to your computer Owner’s Manual

or contact your dealer for printer recommendations.

Unattended Download

Unattended download allows the control panel to

communicate with the download computer without an

operator at the computer. This feature is useful on new

installations.

The installer can mount the control, attach a keypad

and phone line, and continue to wire the rest of the

installation while the system is automatically

downloaded.

The following items must be programmed for

unattended download:

• The account number (field ✳32)

• Primary central station telephone number (field

✳33)

• The download telephone number (field ✳35)

• Unattended Mode (enable in field ✳54.)

NOTE: The default for field ✳54 is enabled (1).

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

7-2

Installer Unattended Program Mode

The Installer Unattended Program Mode allows the

installer to program fields ✳32, ✳33, and ✳35 without

entering the normal program mode.

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) in response to the displayed

menu selection. Pressing 0 displays the next choice in

sequence.

To access this mode, enter Installer Code +[#] + [89]. The following prompt appears:

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Unattend. Phone

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Press 1 to enter the unattended phone number.

Unattend. Phone 1 Enter the telephone number of the download software modem.

Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9;A key = ✳, B key = #, C key = 2-Sec. Pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Press the

✳ key to accept the phone number and exit.

Press the # key to exit without changing any data.

The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit the Installer Unattended Program Mode, or 0 to

continue to the next prompt.

Unattended Acct#

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Press 1 to enter the unattended account number.

Unattended Acct#

15-15-15-15

Enter a 3-or 4-digit (depending on report format) account number 00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires

a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used,

enter digits in the first 3 locations, and enter 00 in the last location.

Press the ✳ to exit without changing any data.

The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit, or 0 to continue.

Primary Phone

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Press 1 to enter the primary phone number.

Primary Phone 0 Enter the primary central station telephone number.

Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9;A key = ✳, B key = #, C key = 2-Sec. Pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Press the

D key accept the phone number and exit.

Press the ✳ to exit without changing any data.

The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit, or 0 to continue.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to quit the Installer Unattended Program Mode. Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the first

menu prompt, “UNATTEND. PHONE”.

Trig. Unattended

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to initiate the unattended download at this time. Otherwise enter 0.

NOTE: The ADEMCO Compass Downloader must be in Unattended Mode.

An unattended download may be initiated by the installer or end user at any time by entering User Code +[#] + [1].

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel

At the protected premises, the control panel must be

connected to the existing telephone line (refer to the

SECTION 3: Installing the Control). No programming

of the panel is required before downloading to an initial

installation unless you are performing an unattended

download.

When establishing a connection between the computer

and the control panel, the following occurs:

Stage What Happens

1 The computer calls up the control panel.

(The phone number for each customer must

be entered into the customer’s account file

on the computer.)

2 The control panel answers the phone call at

the pre-programmed ring count and executes

a handshake with the computer.

Section 7 – Downloading

7-3

Stage What Happens

3 The computer sends a request for callback to

the control, unless callback is not required.

4 The panel acknowledges the request and

hangs up. During the next few seconds, the

control processes the request, making sure

certain encrypted information received from

the computer matches its own memory.

5 Upon a successful match, the control panel

seizes the phone line and calls the computer

back, unless callback is not required. (The

phone number to which the computer’s

modem is connected must be programmed

into the control field ✳35.)

6 The computer answers, usually by the

second ring, and executes a handshake with

the panel.

7 The panel then sends other default

information to the computer. If this

information matches the computer’s

information, a successful link is established.

The system is now “on-line” with the

computer.

• Alarms and Trouble responses and reports

are disabled during actual uploading or

downloading sessions. If you are on-line,

but not actively uploading or downloading,

all alarms report immediately. All other

reports are delayed until you complete the

session.

• The keypads remain active when on-line

with a control, but are inactive during

actual uploading or downloading sessions.

To download a control without programming any

information, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter the

Installer Code + [#] + [5]. The

panel temporarily enables a ring count of 5

and sets the Download Callback option to “1”

(callback not required).

2 From the computer, call the panel using the

downloader software set to “First

Communication” Mode.

The downloader establishes a session with no

callback. The panel information can then be

downloaded.

On-Line Control Functions

The following functions can be performed while on-line

with a control panel (see field *37):

• Arm the system in the AWAY Mode; disarm the

system

• Bypass a zone

• Force the system to accept a new program

download

• Shut down communication (dialer) functions (for

nonpayment of monitoring fees in an owned

system)

• Shut down all security system functions (for

nonpayment for a leased system)

• Inhibit local keypad programming (prevents

takeover of your accounts)

• Leave a message for customer

NOTE: Messages sent to the control panel from the

downloader will be viewable at ALL partitions.

• Command the system to upload a copy of its

resident program to the office

• Read: arming status, AC power status, list of

faulted zones, list of bypassed zones, 1024 event

log, list of zones currently in alarm, list of zones

currently in trouble, and ECP equipment list

• Set the real-time clock

Scheduled Download

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP can be

programmed to periodically and automatically call the

downloader. When this option is set up, the system will

call the downloader at a scheduled time. Once the

connection is established with the modem, the

downloader controls which functions are performed

(download, arm, upload event log, etc.).

The programmable options for the scheduled download

are located in the #93 Menu Mode in the Programming

Guide under the main menu prompt Scheduled Check-

in.

The options are as follows:

• Check-in interval (weekly, monthly quarterly,

yearly)

• Quarter of the year (if quarterly is selected)

• Month of the year (if monthly, quarterly, or yearly

is selected)

• Day of the month (if monthly, quarterly, or yearly

is selected)

• Day of the week (if weekly is selected)

• Time of day

Refer to the #93 Menu Mode in the Programming Guide

for sequence of the prompts.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

7-4

Direct-Wire Downloading

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP can be downloaded

without using a modem or telephone line by using a

4100SM Serial Module and Compass Downloading

Software. The direct-wire downloading connection is to

be temporary, and is not part of the permanent

installation. Direct-wire downloading is meant as a tool

for the installer during the installation process.

The connections between the control and

the 4100SM are different than those shown

in the 4100SM Installation Instructions. See

Figure 7-1

for the correct connections. In

addition, in place of the green wire, referred to

in step 2 of the “IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY”

section of the 4100SM Instructions, use the

violet wire instead.

Connector J2 on the main PC board (see the Summary

of Connections diagram on the inside back cover of this

manual) is intended to be interfaced to either a local

serial printer (see Event Log Connections in SECTION

3 Installing the Control) or a computer. Make

connections to a computer as shown below. Note that

the violet wire connection for a computer differs

from that used when connecting a serial printer.

Remove the VA8201 Alpha Pager Module, if it

is installed, before performing the direct-wire

download. It may be reconnected once the

direct-wire download is completed.

123456789

INPUT 1

GROUND

OUT 1

OUT 4

OUT 7

OUT 3

OUT 6

OUT 2

OUT 5

J2 CONNECTOR

(VIOLET)

(GRAY)

(YELLOW)

(WHITE)

(RED)

(GREEN)

(BROWN)

BLUE

BLACK

4142TR CABLE

+ PWR

– (GND)

RXD

not used

TXD

not used

BLUERED WHITE

10 FT.

CABLE

SUPPLIED

WITH 4100SM

DOWNLOADING

(TO TERM 11)

–

(TO TERM 12)

▲▲

AUX PWR 1

OUTPUT

NOTE: ENTER THE INSTALLER

CODE + [#] + [5] TO INITIATE

DOWNLOADING BEFORE MAKING

THE ABOVE CONNECTIONS TO

AVOID TRIGGERING A FAULT ON

INPUT 1.

4100SM

Figure 7-1: Direct-Wire Downloading Connections

Telco Handoff

Telco handoff is another method of getting on-line with the downloader. The installer or customer enters the User Code

+ [#] + [1], while on the phone line with the computer’s modem phone line. The customer will get cut-off and the panel

and download computer will establish a connection.

8-1

SECTION 8

Setting the Real-Time Clock

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

This system provides a real-time clock, which must be

set in order for the system’s event log to keep track of

events by time and date. It must also be set in order to

execute scheduling programs (Time-Driven events). If

you are using Panel Linking, you can set the Real-Time

clock at one panel and have the system automatically

update the time and date at the other control panels.

Use a 6139/6160 alpha keypad to set the real-

time clock, or set the clock via the downloader

software. Only users with Installer or Master

authority level can set the clock.

Setting the Time and Date

To set the real time clock, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter Installer or Master Code + [#] 63.

Typical display shows:

TIME/DATE –– THU

12:01 AM 01/01/90

The day of the week is automatically

calculated based on the date entered. Time

and date entries are made by simply entering

the appropriate hour, minute, month, day

and year.

Press [✳] to move the cursor to the right of

the display, to the next position.

Press [#] to move the cursor to the left of the

display, to the previous position.

2Enter the correct hour. Then press [✳] to

move to the “minutes” field.

3Enter the correct minutes. Press [✳] to move

to the AM/PM position.

Step Action

4 Press any key 0-9 to change AM to PM, or PM

to AM. Press [✳] to move cursor to the

“month” field position.

5 Enter the correct month using a 2-digit entry.

Press [✳] to move cursor to the “day” field

position.

6 Enter the correct day using a 2-digit entry.

Press [✳] to move cursor to the “year” field

position.

7 Enter the correct year.

Press [✳] to continue.

8 The following display appears:

Broadcast Time?

1=YES 0=NO 0

If panel linking is being used, enter 1 (YES)

to send this time and date setting to all the

other panels. Otherwise enter 0.

Press [✳] to exit the real-time clock edit

mode.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

8-2

9-1

SECTION 9

User Access Codes

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

The VISTA-128FBP system allows a total of 150

security access codes to be allocated. The VISTA-

250FBP allows a total of 250 security access codes to be

allocated. Each security access code is identified by a

user ID number. Regardless of the number of

partitions each code has access to, it occupies

only one user slot in the system. If a particular

code is not used in all partitions, that user ID

number cannot be used again.

The Quick Arm feature can also be programmed

(partition-specific program field *29). The Quick Arm

feature allows the user to arm the system by pressing

the [#] key instead of the security code. The security

code must always be entered to disarm the system.

• A user code other than the installer code

must be programmed in order for the Quick

Arm feature to function.

• Users 001-050 are the only users that can

perform panel linking and are automatically

assigned panel linking access.

The system is shipped with the following defaults

for the user codes:

User 4-Digit Code Alpha Descriptor

User 1 (Installer) 5140 INSTLR

User 2 1234 MASTER

User Codes & Levels of Authority

Each user of the system can be assigned a level of

authority, which authorizes the user for certain system

functions. A user can have different levels of authority

within different partitions

Use the “View Capabilities” keypad function (User

Code + [✳] + [✳]) to view the partitions and authority

levels for which a particular user is authorized. These

levels are described below.

Level 0: Installer (User 1) Code

• Programmed in field *00 (default = 5-1-4-0).

Installer Open/Close reporting selected in field *39.

• Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm,

bypass, etc.), but cannot disarm if armed by

another code (or by Quick Arm).

• Can add, delete, or change all other codes, and can

select Open/Close reports for any user.

• Is the only code that can be used to enter program

mode. The Installer Code can be prevented from re-

entering the Program Mode by exiting using ∗98.

• Must program at least one Master Code during

initial installation. Master Codes are codes

intended for use by the primary user(s) of the

system.

Level 1: Master Codes

• Can perform all normal system functions.

• Can be used to assign up to 148 lower-level codes,

which can be used by other users of the system.

• Cannot assign anybody a level of 0 or 1.

• May change his own code.

• Can add, delete, or change Manager or Operator

Codes. Each user’s code can be individually

eliminated or changed at any time.

• Open/Close reporting is automatically the same as

that of the Master who is adding the new user.

Level 2: Manager Codes

• Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm,

bypass, etc.) programmed by Master.

• May add, delete, or change other users of the

system below this level (Manager cannot assign

anybody a level of 0, 1, or 2).

• May change his own code.

• Open/Close reporting is automatically the same as

that of the Manager who is adding the new user.

Levels 3-5: Operator Codes

• Can operate a partition, but cannot add or modify

any user code (see table below).

Level Title Functions Permitted

3 Operator A Arm, Disarm, Bypass

4 Operator B Arm, Disarm

5 Operator C Arm, Disarm only if armed with

same code

• Operator C (sometimes known as the Babysitter

Code) cannot disarm the system unless the system

was armed with that code. This code is usually

assigned to persons who may need to arm and

disarm the system at specific times only (e.g., a

babysitter needs to control the system only when

babysitting).

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

9-2

Level 6: Duress Codes

• Sends a silent alarm to a central monitoring station

if the user is being forced to disarm (or arm) the

system under threat (system must be connected to

a central station).

• When the system’s Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are

connected to another communication’s media

(Derived Channel/Long Range Radio), note that

duress is signaled on the same trigger that signals

silent panic (whereas duress has its own unique

report when digitally communicated).

• Assigned on a partition-by-partition basis, and can

be any code or codes desired.

Duress Reporting NOTE: A non-zero report

code for zone 992 (duress) must be

programmed, and partition-specific field *85

duress location enabled, to enable Duress

reporting.

• The Duress report-triggering logic activates on the

5th key depression (such as OFF), not the 4th key

depression (last digit of code). Duress reports are

not triggered if the 5th key is a [*], such as when

you perform a GOTO or view the capabilities of a

user.

General Rules on Authority Levels and Changes

The following rules apply to users when making modifications

within the system based on the user code authority levels:

• Master Codes and all lower-level codes can be used

interchangeably when performing system functions within a

partition (a system armed with a user’s temporary code can

be disarmed with the Master Code or another user’s

temporary code), except the Operator Level C Code

described above.

• A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME

or HIGHER authority than that which he is assigned.

• A user (levels 0, 1 and 2 only) may only ADD users to a

LOWER authority level.

• A user may assign other users access to only those

partitions to which he himself has access.

• A user code can be DELETED or CHANGED only from

within the partition it was created in.

• User numbers must be entered in 3 digits. Single-digit user

numbers must, therefore, always be preceded by a “00”

(e.g., 003, 004, 005, etc.). Make sure the end user

understands this requirement. Temporary codes are entered

as 4-digit numbers.

Open/Close Reporting Note: When a user is added,

the system prompts for Open/Close reporting capability

only if the installer is adding the new user. When a

Master or Manager adds a new user, the new user’s

Open/Close reporting is the same as that of the Master

or Manager who is adding the user. If Open/Close

reports are required to be selectable by the Master or

Manager, the Installer should assign two Master or

Manager user codes: one with Open/Close reporting

enabled, and one without.

Note that Open/Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled

if User 002 is enabled for Open/Close reporting, and

that Quick Arm reports as User 000. In order for Quick

Arm reports to be sent for all partitions, User 002 must

have authority and Open/Close must be enabled for all

partitions. If a code with access to all partitions is not

desired, it is suggested that user 002 be assigned

authority level 5 in all partitions, and that the code be

kept secret. Authority level 5 cannot disarm the system

unless armed by that user.

ADEMCO Contact ID format is capable of

reporting Users 001-150 uniquely. If any other

report format is used, only user numbers 001 –

015 can uniquely report to the central station.

Users 016 – 150 will report as User 015.

Multiple Partition Access

Each user is programmed for a primary (home)

partition. A user can also be given access to operate

one or more additional partitions. Within each

partition, each user may be programmed to have

different levels of authority. For example, User 003,

the VP of Engineering, could be assigned to work within

the Engineering Department (Partition 1) of ABC

Manufacturing. Because he needs the full capabilities

in his area, he is assigned as a MASTER with Level 1

authority.

He must also be able to gain access to the

manufacturing area (Partition 2) on an emergency

basis. You can set this up easily by requesting that he

also be assigned to Partition 2, with a level of authority

set lower, such as Level 4 (OPERATOR Level B).

The control automatically assigns him the same user

number within Partition 2.

EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS

Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Part 6 Part 7 Part 8

User 3 User 3

Level 1 Level 4

Master Oper B

In the above example, User 3 has MASTER authority in

Partition 1 and OPERATOR B authority in Partition 2.

His user number is the same for both partitions. Note

that if a user number is already being used in a

partition, the system will automatically assign a new

user an unused number. Also notice that no access is

allowed for this user into Partitions 3 – 8. Attempts to

access these partitions would be denied automatically.

Section 9 – User Access Codes

9-3

Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

During user code entry, normal key

depressions at other keypads in a partition are

ignored. However, panic key depression

causes an alarm and terminates user entry.

When entering panel link users (001-050) on the

local panel, the other remote panels will be

prevented from entering panel link user data until

the local panel exits User Edit Mode.

Enter Installer Code†+ [8] + new user no. (002-150)

+ new user’s code

†Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a

higher level of authority than the code being changed

(e.g., a Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code,

but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).

Keypad prompts for the authority level for this user.

NOTE: All references to the number of user codes

pertain to the VISTA-250FBP. The VISTA-128FBP

allows only 150 user codes.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

User Number = 003

Enter Auth. Level

Enter the level number as follows:

1 = Master

2 = Manager

3 = Operator Level A

4 = Operator Level B

5 = Operator Level C

6 = Duress

Keypad then prompts for Open/Close reporting option for this user.

Open/Close Rep.?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not arming/disarming by this user will trigger

Opening and Closing reports. This prompt appears only if the Installer Code is used to add a

user.

Group Bypassing?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Enter 1 (YES) to allow this user to perform group bypasses. Enter 0 (NO) this user will not be

able to perform group bypasses.

NOTE: In addition to enabling the user for group bypassing, the user must also have access to

the partition(s) containing the zones being bypassed and have global arming capability.

Access Group?

Enter 0-8

If access schedules have been programmed, this prompt appears. Enter the user’s access

group number (1-8) if this user should have limited access to the system. Enter 0 if no access

group should be assigned.

RF Button ?

0=NO , 1=YES

If a 5800 Series button transmitter has been enabled for arming/disarming functions, and is not

assigned to a user, this prompt appears. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).

Enter Button ZN #

(001-087)

If you answered “yes” to the RF button question, the zone number for the button is requested.

Enter any one of the zone numbers assigned to the button transmitter as AWAY, STAY, or

DISARM. The system then assigns all buttons of the transmitter to this user number.

Multi-Access ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) if the user is to have access to this partition only. Press 1 (YES) if the user is to

have access to more than one partition. If NO, the program exits this mode. If YES, the keypad

prompts for the Global Arm option for this user.

Global Arm ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will be allowed to arm more than one

partition via Global Arm prompts (described in the

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP User Guide

The keypad now prompts for the user’s access to the next partition.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

9-4

PROMPT EXPLANATION

Part. 2 – SHOP ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will have access to the displayed

partition number. If NO, the keypad displays this prompt for the next partition number in

sequence.

If YES, the keypad prompts for the following:

• User’s authority level in the displayed partition (see Authority Level prompt above).

• Open/Close option for this user in the displayed partition (see Open/Close prompt above).

• Global Arm option for this user in the displayed partition.

When all partitions have been displayed, the keypad will scroll through all partitions to which

access has been assigned, and will display the user number, authority level, open/close and

global arm options that were programmed for each partition to which the user was granted

access. For example:

XMT USER DATA

1 = YES 0 = NO

If the user number is from 001-050 this appears. Answer YES (1) to have the system send the

user’s attributes to all the other control panels that are “linked” to this control. If you answer NO

(0), the system displays the following prompt on the next page.

INDV USER PGM

1 = YES 0 = NO

Answer YES (1) to link to another control panel and manually enter the user into partition(s) in

that control panel. If you answer NO (0), the system scrolls through each partition displaying a

summary of the user’s attributes in each partition (see next prompt).

Part. 1 A0* WHSE

User 003 Auth=3G.

Note that the “G” following the authority level indicates that the global arm feature is enabled for

this user in the displayed partition, and that the period at the end of the second line indicates

Open/Close reporting is enabled for this user in the displayed partition. The “T” indicates the

partition from which the user may be changed or deleted.

Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

Enter Installer Code*+ [8] + new user no. (002-150) + new user’s code

*Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a higher level of authority than the code being changed (e.g. a

Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).

NOTE: The VISTA-128FBP allows only 150 user codes.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

User Number = 003

NEW USER?

The system detects that the user number is already assigned, and prompts if this is a new user.

Press 0 (NO).

The system then confirms that the change is allowed based on authorization level.

Adding an RF Key to an Existing User

To add an RF key to an existing user, or to change a user’s global arm option, first delete that user’s code, then re-add

the user code as described in the “Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code” paragraph.

Section 9 - User Access Codes

9-5

Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

Enter your code*+ [8] + new user no. (002-150) + your code again

*Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a higher level of authority than the code being changed (e.g. a

Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).

NOTE: The VISTA-128FBP allows only 150 user codes.

PROMPT EXPLANATION

OK TO DELETE 003?

0=NO 1=YES

The system prompts to confirm that you want to delete this user. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).

If you answered “yes,” that user’s code is removed from all partitions to which it was assigned,

and all authorization levels and other information about that user are deleted. Note that a user

can be deleted only by a user with a higher authority level. A user cannot delete himself.

A user code can be deleted only from the partition through which it was entered. If an attempt is made to

delete from another partition, the message “User [XXX] Not Deleted” is displayed.

Exiting the User Edit Mode

Press either [✴] or [#], or don’t press any key for 10 seconds.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

9-6

10-1

SECTION 10

Testing the System

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Battery Test

When AC power is present, the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-

250FBP runs a brief battery test every 60 seconds to

determine if there is a battery connected, and runs an

extended battery test every 4 hours to check on the

battery’s condition.

If the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP finds that the

battery voltage is low (less than approximately 11.5V),

it initiates a keypad “SYSTEM LOBAT” display and a

rapid keypad beeping sound. It also sends a Low

Battery report to the central station (if programmed).

The keypad is cleared by entering any security code +

OFF, and a Restore report is sent to the central station

if the situation has been corrected.

Dialer Test

The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP may be

programmed to automatically transmit test reports to a

central station at intervals ranging from once per hour

to once per 9999 hours (field ✳27).

UL requires the test report to be transmitted at least

once every 24 hours. The system can be programmed to

send the first report at any time of the day, or on any

day of the week (field ✳83).

Fire Drill Test (Code + [#] + 69)

This test causes fire Notification Appliance Circuits (or

any NAC having a non-zero response type programmed)

to be activated (in either steady or pulsing manner, as

programmed in field 3✳15, for the purpose of

conducting a fire drill or bell test. This test can only be

activated by the installer or master users from partition

1 keypads by entering the corresponding security code +

[#] + 69. The burglary portion of the system must be

disarmed.

Keypads display “FIRE DRILL ACTIVE” while the test

is active. The test is stopped by entering any user code

+ OFF.

The system continues to monitor all 24-hour type zones

(fire, panic, etc.) and ends the test if any of these zone

types produce an alarm condition.

This test should be conducted at periodic intervals, as

determined by the local authority having jurisdiction.

One-Man Fire Walk-Test (Code + [#] + 68)

This test causes the system to sound console beeps and

Notification Appliance Circuit dings in response to fire

zone faults (zone type 9, 16 & 17) for the purpose of

allowing proper zone operation to be checked without

triggering alarms. Note that the system will not be

operational as an alarm system (i.e., cannot sense

alarms) while this test is active. The test can only be

activated by the installer by entering the Installer’s

Code and pressing [#] + 68 while the burglary portion of

the system is disarmed.

This test should be conducted at periodic intervals, as

determined by the local authority having jurisdiction.

When testing non-latching devices, such as heat

detectors, be sure to keep the device faulted

until the system responds with the keypad beep

or siren sound. If the device is faulted only

momentarily, the system may not respond to the

fault.

When this test is first activated, the system will display:

PROMPT EXPLANATION

USE BELL DING?

0=NO 1=YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the fire Notification Appliance Circuits associated with each point sound for 3 seconds

when a point is faulted.

Enter 0 (NO) if only keypad sounders are desired.

The next prompt will be displayed.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

10-2

PROMPT EXPLANATION

AUTO-TEST DET?

0=NO 1=YES

Enter 1(YES) to have the system automatically test all polling loop points with a fire response type 9 or 16.

Other fire zones will have to be tested manually.

Enter 0(NO) to test every point manually.

The next prompt will be displayed.

For true detector sensitivity tests, and for compliance with fire codes, you must enter 0 (NO) to this question.

LOG RESULTS?

0=NO 1=YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the system log each point as it is tested. A list of untested points will also be logged.

Enter 0 (NO) if you do not want to log the results.

The next prompt will only be displayed if Contact ID report format has been selected.

C.S. TRANSMIT?

0=NO 1=YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the results of the test sent to the central station. This report will consist of a list of

points that have been tested followed by a list of points that have not been tested.

Enter 0 (NO) if you do not want to report the results. A Walk-Test Start and Walk-Test End report will be

sent in either case (if programmed).

When the Test Mode is activated, the system will sound

fire Notification Appliance Circuits (or any NAC having

a non-zero response type programmed in the #93 Menu

Mode) for 3 seconds. The system will also send a Start

of Walk-Test message to the central station, and will

light all keypad indicators (except the ARMED LED)

and display window segments to verify that they are

working properly. The keypads will then display Fire

Walk-Test in Progress and will sound a single beep

every 15 seconds while this test is active.

The system will build a list of all the fire zones

(response types 9, 16, 17, 18) that need to be tested.

These points will be scrolled on the display. For each

point, the keypad will display "UNTST XXX," where

XXX is the point number, followed by an alpha

descriptor for the point.

If the auto-test option has been selected, the control

panel will attempt to automatically test all of the

polling loop points that have a zone response type of 9

or 16. For points that must be manually tested, fault

and reset each fire alarm sensor in turn.

Each action should cause keypads to beep and fire

Notification Appliance Circuits to ding. The keypads

will display the zone number and the associated alpha

descriptor while the zone remains faulted. The system

automatically issues a smoke detector power reset

about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on one of these

zones, to allow faulted detectors to be reset.

The system will automatically perform the

smoke detector reset on zones 1 & 2, if

programmed for fire, and on the auxiliary relay

and any other output device (relay) that is

programmed for smoke detector reset.

To end the test, enter any security code and press OFF.

An End of Walk-Test message will be sent to the central

station (if programmed). Note that the test will

automatically end if no faults are detected within a 60-

minute time period.

Burglary Walk-Test (Code + [5] TEST)

This test causes the system to sound keypad beeps in

response to faults on zones for the purpose of allowing

proper zone operation to be checked without triggering

alarms. This test can be activated by any user by

entering the corresponding security code and pressing

TEST while the burglary portion of the system is

disarmed. UL requires that this test be conducted on a

weekly basis.

When this test is first entered, the system activates the

alarm output for 3 seconds. The system sends a Start of

Walk-Test message to the central station. The keypad

displays “Burg Walk Test in Progress” and sounds a

single beep every 15 seconds while the test remains

active.

Open and close each protected door and window in turn.

Each action should produce 3 beeps from the keypad.

Walk in front of any motion detectors. Listen for three

beeps when the detector senses movement. The keypad

displays the zone number and alpha descriptor while a

door or window remains open or while a detector

remains activated. The system automatically issues a

Zone 8 Glassbreak Detector Power Reset about 10

seconds after it finds a fault on this zone, to allow

faulted detectors to be reset.

To end this test, enter any security code and press OFF.

An End of Walk-Test message is sent to the central

station.

Section 10 – Testing the System

10-1

The system automatically exits the Test mode if there is no activity (no doors or windows are opened and

closed, no motion detectors are activated, etc.) for 30 minutes on the VISTA-128FBP, 60 minutes on the

VISTA-250FBP. The system beeps the keypad(s) twice every 5 seconds during the last 5 minutes as a

warning that it is about to exit the Test mode and return to normal operation.

Armed Burglary System Test

• Alarm messages are sent to the central

station during the armed tests. Notify the

central station that a test will be in progress.

• A display of “COMM FAILURE” indicates a

failure to communicate (no kissoff by the

receiver at the central station). If this occurs,

verify that the phone line is connected, the

correct report format is programmed, etc.

To perform an armed burglary test, proceed as follows:

Step Action

1 Notify the central station that a test of the

system is being performed.

2 Arm the system.

3 Fault one or more zones.

4 Silence alarm sounder(s) each time by

entering the code and pressing OFF.

NOTE: The system must be rearmed after

each code + off sequence.

5 Check that entry/exit delay zones provide the

assigned delay times.

Step Action

6 Check the keypad-initiated alarms, if

programmed, by pressing the panic key pairs

(✳ and #, 1 and ✳, and/or 3 and #).

The word ALARM and a descriptor “999” are

displayed for ✳ and #. If [1] and [✳] are

pressed, “995” is displayed; if [3] and [#] are

pressed, “996” is displayed.

7 If the system has been programmed for

audible emergency, the keypad emits a loud,

steady alarm sound. Silence the alarm by

entering the security code and pressing OFF.

If the system has been programmed for silent

panic, there are no audible alarms or

displays. A report is sent to the central

station, however.

8 Notify the central station that all tests are

finished, and verify results with them.

Testing Wireless Transmitters

Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode

Use the Transmitter Sniffer Mode to test that

transmitters have all been properly programmed.

If a transmitter does not have its serial number

“enrolled,” it will not turn off its zone number.

To enter the Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode, proceed as

follows:

Step Action

1 Enter

Installer Code + [#] + [3]. The

keypad displays all zone numbers of wireless

units programmed into the system.

2 Fault each wireless zone, causing each device

to transmit.

As the system receives a signal from each of

the transmitters, the zone number of that

transmitter disappears from the display.

3 Enter

Installer Code + OFF to exit the

Sniffer Mode.

Go/No Go Test Mode

This mode assists in determining good mounting

locations, and that the RF transmission has sufficient

signal amplitude margin for the installed system.

• All partitions with wireless transmitters must

be placed in the test mode for RF receiver

sensitivity reduction (50%). Otherwise, the

RF receiver remains at full strength.

• Make sure that all partitions are disarmed

for this test.

To enter the Go/No Go Test Mode, proceed as follows:

Step Action

1 Enter

Installer Code + [5].

2 Fault each wireless transmitter, causing each

device to transmit.

The keypad will beep three times if the signal

is received.

3 If the keypad does not beep, reorient or move

the transmitter to another location. Usually

a few inches in either direction is all that is

required.

4 Enter

Installer Code + OFF to exit the

Go/No Go Test Mode.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

10-4

Trouble Conditions

Supervisory Messages

Display Description

SUPV +

Zone

Number

This indicates that a fire supervisory

condition exists on the zone number

displayed. This means that the operation

of the fire alarm system may be

compromised.

Check or Trouble Messages

Display Description

CHECK or

TRBL

(as per field

1✳07)

This indicates that a problem exists on

the zone number displayed. Zone trouble

may be caused by one of the following

conditions:

• A hardwired fire zone is open

(broken wire).

• A Day/Night zone (zone type 5) is

faulted.

• A polling loop zone is not seen by

the control panel.

• A polling loop zone has been

tampered (cover removed on a

4190).

• A wireless zone has not checked in

during the time programmed in field

1✳31.

• A 5800 Series transmitter has been

tampered (cover removed).

CHECK 6XX

XX = 01-32 This indicates a trouble on a 4204CF

Supervised Notification Appliance Circuit

(corresponding relay number 01-32).

CHECK 8XX

XX = 00-30 This indicates a trouble on a peripheral

device (connected to the panel’s keypad

terminals) of the corresponding device

address (00-30).

CHECK 9XX

XX = 00-99 This indicates that a system trouble

exists (RF receiver, Notification

Appliance Circuit, etc.).

If the problem has been corrected, enter an

OFF sequence (Security Code + OFF) twice

to clear the display.

Power Failure

Display Description

AC LOSS

POWER

LED is off

This indicates that the system is

operating on battery power only. Check

to see that the circuit breaker for the

branch circuit that your system’s

transformer is wired to has not been

accidentally turned off. Instruct the

user to call a service representative

immediately if AC power cannot be

restored.

Other System Messages

Display Description

COMM

FAILURE Indicates a failure occurred in the

telephone communication portion of your

system.

LO BAT Indicates a low-battery condition exists in

the wireless transmitter displayed.

Pressing any key silences the audible

warning sound.

SYSTEM

LO BAT This indicates that a low-battery condition

exists with the system’s backup battery.

HSENS Indicates a smoke detector with a high

sensitivity level, which may cause a false

alarm. The detector should be cleaned or

replaced.

LSENS Indicates a smoke detector with a low

sensitivity level. The detector may not

detect a smoke condition. The detector

should be cleaned or replaced.

RCVR

SETUP

ERROR

Indicates the system has more wireless

zones programmed than the RF receiver

can support. If this is not corrected, none

of the zones in the system will be

protected. If additional wireless zones are

desired, use an appropriate receiver.

MODEM

COMM This indicates that the control is on-line

with a remote computer.

System Off-Normal Report

If programmed, an Off-Normal report is generated

instead of the periodic test report if any of the following

conditions are present at the time of the report:

• Fire trouble on any zone (zone types 9, 16, 17, 18)

• Fire supervisory present (zone type 18)

• Unrestored fire alarm on any zone

• Bypass of any fire zone

• A fault for any supervised fire Notification

Appliance Circuit

• Bypass/disable of any supervised fire Notification

Appliance Circuit

• Telco fault of either dialer line

• Bypass/disable of either dialer line

• Earth ground fault

• Bypass of earth ground supervisory zone

• Fault on LORRA “XMIT OK” signal (if enabled)

• LORRA trigger bypassed

• AC failure

• Low system battery

• Keypad supervision fault

The Off-Normal report is sent as follows:

• Contact ID: Code 608

• High Speed: Channel 3 of system report used

(channel 9=6)

• Low Speed: Digits programmed in System Group

#4 report codes

Section 10 – Testing The System

10-5

To the Installer

Regular maintenance and inspection (at least annually)

by the installer and frequent testing by the user are

vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any alarm

system.

The installer should assume the responsibility of

developing and offering a regular maintenance program

to the user as well as acquainting the user with the

proper operation and limitations of the alarm system

and its component parts. Recommendations must be

included for a specific program of frequent testing (at

least weekly) to ensure the system’s proper operation at

all times.

Turning the System over to the User

Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by

going over each of its functions, as well as the User’s

Manual supplied.

In particular, explain the operation of each zone

(entry/exit, perimeter, interior, fire, etc.). Be sure the

user understands how to operate any emergency

feature(s) programmed into the system.

Contacting Technical Support

PLEASE, before you call Technical Support, be sure

you:

• READ THE INSTRUCTIONS!

• Check all wiring connections.

• Determine that the power supply and/or backup

battery are supplying proper voltages.

• Verify your programming information where

applicable.

• Verify that all keypads and devices are addressed

properly.

• Note the proper model number of this product, and

the version level (if known) along with any

documentation that came with the product.

• Note your ADEMCO customer number and/or

company name.

Having this information handy will make it easier for

us to serve you quickly and effectively.

You may contact Technical Support via Toll-Free Fax.

Please include your return fax number. You will receive

a reply within 24 hours. You may also contact Technical

Support via modem to ATLIS-BBS, Tech Support’s

Electronic Bulletin Board System. Replies are posted

within 24 hours.

Technical Support:.....................................................1-800-645-7492 (8 a.m.-8 p.m. EST)

ATLIS-FAX FAXBACK Automated Fax Retrieval System:.....................1-800-573-0153 or

................................................................................................. 1-516-921-6704 / ext. 1667

World Wide Web Address: .................................................HTTP://WWW.ADEMCO.COM

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

10-6

A-1

APPENDIX A

Regulatory Agency Statements

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

UL Installation Requirements

The following requirements apply to both UL residential and UL commercial burglary installations:

1. All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person(s).

2. All partitions must be part of one building at one street address.

3. The audible alarm device(s) must be placed where it/they can be heard by all partitions.

4. The control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access. This can be done by installing a

tamper switch on the cabinet door (supplied with VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP) or by installing a UL

Listed passive infrared detector positioned to detect cabinet access. Wire the selected device to any

EOLR-supervised zone (Zone 1-8). Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour

audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned

systems.

5. Remote downloading and auto-disarming are not UL Listed features.

UL864/NFPA Local Fire

Configure at least one Notification Appliance Circuit for supervision and wire polarized fire alarm indicators

to it. Program this circuit for temporal sounding.

UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire

1. Size the backup battery for 24-hour standby (central station) or 60-hour standby (remote station) time.

2. For central station service, you may use the 7720ULF or 7920SE LORRAs alone, the main dialer with a

LORRA, or the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module. For remote station service, you

must use the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module.

3. When using the LORRA, connect its channel inputs to the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP's fire alarm,

fire supervisory (if used), and trouble triggers. Also connect its XMIT OKAY output to Input 1 on the

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP's J2 header. Program J2 Input 1 system Zone 973 for 24-hour trouble

response (type 19) to send radio faults.

4. When the main dialer is used, enable it (field 3*30) and connect it to a telephone line. Assign a 24-hour

trouble response (type 19) to system Zone 974 to enable main dialer supervision. The VISTA-

128FBP/VISTA-250FBP will activate the trouble trigger when it detects a main dialer supervision fault.

5. When the backup dialer is used, install it on the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP's PCB shield. Enable it

(field 3*30) and connect it to a separate telephone line. Assign a 24-hour trouble response (type 19) to

system Zone 975 to enable backup dialer supervision.

6. When the dialer is used, program it to send fire alarm, fire supervisory (if used), trouble, AC loss, low

battery, normal dialer test, and off-normal dialer test reports. Field *27 must be set to "024" maximum

so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours.

7. If a secondary number is programmed, set the maximum number of dialer re-tries to 3, 4, or 5 in field

3*21.

UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault

1. Use the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP.

2. All zones must be configured for EOLR supervision (*41=0). Wireless sensors may not be used. If

4190WH RPMs are used, set field *24 to "0" to enable tamper detection.

3. Attach a door tamper switch (supplied) to the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP cabinet backbox. For safe

and vault installations, a shock sensor (not supplied) must also be attached to the backbox. (Also see

Mounting the Cabinet in SECTION 3: Installing the Control)

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

A-2

4. Wire an ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Bell/Box to the Notification Appliance Circuit. Bell wires must be run

in conduit. Program the Notification Appliance Circuit for 16 minutes or longer timeout and for

confirmation of arming ding. (Also see SECTION 3: Installing the Control)

5. Wire the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP tamper switch and AB12 Bell/Box tamper switches to any

EOLR supervised zone (zones 1-8). Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour

audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned

systems.

6. Entry delays must not exceed 45 seconds, and exit delays must not exceed 60 seconds.

UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm

Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above.

For Grade A Service:

• You may use the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP dialer alone, or the 7720 Long Range Radio alone.

• When using the dialer, program it to send Burglary Alarm, Low Battery and Communicator Test

reports. Field *27 must be set to "024" (or less) so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours.

• If using the 7720, connect it to the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.

For Grade AA Service:

• You must use a 7920SE Long Range Radio.

• Connect the 7920SE to the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.

UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm

Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above.

For Grade A Service:

• You must use the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP's dialer with a 7720 Long Range Radio.

• Connect the control's burglary/audible panic alarm trigger (on J2 header) to the 7720. Program a 24-

hour trouble response for Zone 974 to enable main dialer supervision. The VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-

250FBP will activate the burglary/audible panic trigger when a corresponding alarm is detected, and

will activate the trouble trigger when a main dialer fault is detected.

• Also connect the 7720's radio fault output to one of the VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP's EOLR-

supervised zones (i.e., 1-8). Program this zone for a trouble by day/alarm by night (type 05) or a 24-hour

alarm (type 07, 08) response to radio faults.

• Program the control's dialer to send Burglary Alarm, Trouble, Opening/Closing, and Low Battery

reports.

For Grade AA Service:

Follow the instructions for Grade A service, except use the 7920SE in place of the 7720.

California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) Requirements.

24-hour backup: The California State Fire Marshal has published new regulations which require that all

residential fire alarm control panels installed after June 30, 1993 must be provided with a backup battery

which has sufficient capacity to operate the panel and its attached peripheral devices for 24 hours in the

intended standby condition, followed by at least 4 minutes in the intended fire alarm signaling condition. Be

sure to size the battery to meet this requirement.

Appendix A – Regulatory Agency Statements

A-3

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) PART 15 STATEMENT

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,

pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS

In the event of telephone operational problems, disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the

RJ31X (CA38A in Canada) wall jack. We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on

installation of the system. Do not disconnect the phone connection inside the control panel. Doing so will

result in the loss of your phone lines. If the regular phone works correctly after the control panel has been

disconnected from the phone lines, the control panel has a problem and should be returned for repair. If

upon disconnection of the control panel, there is still a problem on the line, notify the telephone company

that it has a problem and request prompt repair service. The user may not under any circumstances (in or

out of warranty) attempt any service or repairs to the system. It must be returned to the factory or an

authorized service agency for all repairs. FCC PART 68 NOTICE

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the front cover of this equipment is a label that

contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for

this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.

This equipment uses the following jacks:

An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network.

The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive

RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most,

but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices

that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to

determine the maximum REN for the calling area.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance

that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone

company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a

complaint with the FCC if you believe necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could

affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in

order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.

If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty

information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request

that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.

There are no user serviceable components in this product, and all necessary repairs must be made by the

manufacturer. Other repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product.

This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line

Service is subject to state tariffs.

This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.

When programming or making test calls to an emergency number, briefly explain to the dispatcher the

reason for the call. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

A-4

CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003

NOTICE

The Industry Canada Label identifies certified

equipment. This certification means that the

equipment meets telecommunications network

protective, operational and safety requirements as

prescribed in the appropriate Terminal

Equipment Technical Requirements document(s).

The Department does not guarantee the

equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should

ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the

facilities of the local telecommunications

company. The equipment must also be installed

using an acceptable method of connection. The

customer should be aware that compliance with

the above conditions may not prevent degradation

of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be

coordinated by a representative designated by the

supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the

user to this equipment, or equipment

malfunctions, may cause the telecommunications

company to request the user to disconnect the

equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that

the electrical ground connections of the power

utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic

water pipe system, if present, are connected

together. This precaution may be particularly

important in rural areas.

Caution: Users should not attempt to make such

connections themselves, but should contact an

appropriate electric inspection authority, or

electrician, as appropriate.

NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number

(REN) assigned to each terminal device provides

an indication of the maximum number of

terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone

interface. The termination on an interface may

consist of any combination of devices subject only

to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer

Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not

exceed 5.

AVIS

L’étiquette d’Industrie Canada identifie le

matériel homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le

matériel est conforme aux normes de protection,

d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de

télécommunications, comme le prescrivent les

documents concernant les exigences techniques

relatives au matériel terminal. Le Ministère

n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera

à la satisfaction de l’utilisateur. Avant d’installer

ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est

permis de le raccorder aux installations de

l’enterprise locale de télécommunication. Le

matériel doit également être installé en suivant

une méthode acceptée da raccordement. L’abonné

ne doit pas oublier qu’il est possible que la

conformité aux conditions énoncées ci-dessus

n’empêche pas la dégradation du service dans

certaines situations.

Les réparations de matériel nomologué doivent

être coordonnées par un représentant désigné par

le fournisseur. L’entreprise de

télécommunications peut demander à l’utilisateur

da débrancher un appareil à la suite de

réparations ou de modifications effectuées par

l’utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais

fonctionnement.

Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit

s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à la terre de la

source d’energie électrique, de lignes

téléphoniques et des canalisations d’eau

métalliques, s’il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble.

Cette précaution est particulièrement importante

dans les régions rurales.

Avertissement : L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter

de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir

racours à un service d’inspection des installations

électriques, ou à un électricien, selon le cas.

AVIS : L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie

(IES) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique

le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être

raccordés à une interface. La terminaison d’une

interface téléphonique peut consister en une

combinaison de quelques dispositifs, à la seule

condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de

la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.

B-1

APPENDIX B

Summary of System Commands

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

User Code

Commands Add A User Code = User Code + 8 + New User Number + New User’s Code

Change a Code = User Code + 8 + User Number + New User’s Code

Delete a User’s Code = Your User Code + 8 + User Number to Be Deleted + Your Code

Again

View User Capability = User’s Code + [✳] + [✳]

Set Real-Time Clock (Installer, Master Only) = Code + [#] + 63

Programming

Commands Site Initiated Download = User Code + [#] + 1.

Direct-Wire Download Enable = User Code + [#] + 5.

Enter Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000.

Enter Interactive Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000 + [#] + 93

Exit Program Mode = ✳99 or ✳98.

Event Logging

Commands Event Log Display = Code + [#] + 60 (Installer or Master Only)

Event Log Print = Code + [#] + 61 (Installer or Master Only)

Clear Event Log = Code + [#] + 62 (Installer or Master Only)

Wireless System

Commands House ID Sniffer Mode = Code + [#] + 2 (Installer Only)

Transmitter ID Test = Code + [#] + 3 (Installer Only)

Go/No Go Test = Code + 5 (Test Key)

Partition GOTO User Code + [✳] + Partition Number 0-8.

GOTO Home Partition User Code + [✳] + 0.

Panics [✳] + 1 or A Key (Zone 995).

[✳] + [#] or B Key (Zone 999).

[#] + 3 or C Key (Zone 996).

View Downloaded Messages Press 0 for 5 Seconds.

Display All Zone Descriptors Press [✳] for 5 Seconds.

Additional

Commands

Display User Self Help Hold Any Key for 5 Seconds.

Output Device

Control Commands Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 71.

Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 72.

Activate Output Device Manually = User Code + [#] + 70.

Activate Output Device or System Event Instantly = User Code + [#] + 77.

Randomize Output Devices = User Code + [#] + 41

Randomize Output Devices Programmed with Activation Times Between 6 PM and 5

AM = User Code + [#] + 42.

De-activate Randomization = Enter the sequence used to activate randomization.

Test Mode

Commands Burglary Walk-Test = User Code + 5.

Fire Drill Test = User Code + [#] + 69 (Installer or Master Only).

One-Man Fire Walk-Test = User Code + [#] + 68 (Installer Only)

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

B-2

Scheduling

Commands Installer-Programmed Schedule Events = Installer Code + [#] + 80 (Installer or Master

Only).

Temporary Schedule Editing = User Code + [#] + 81 (Installer, Master, Manager Only).

Extend Closing Window = User Code + [#] + 82 (Installer, Master, Manager Only).

End User Output Device Programming = User Code + [#] + 83.

Access Control

Commands Activate Access Relay for Current Partition = User Code + 0.

Request to Enter/Exit = User Code + [#] + 73.

Request to Enter/Exit at Access Point = User Code + [#] + 74 + Access Point Number.

Change Access Point State = User Code + [#] + 75 + Access Point + State.

Perform a Test of the VistaKey Module = Installer Code + [#] + 78.

Perform an Access Control Card Function = User Code + [#] + 79.

Panel Linking

Commands Only user 001 – 050 can perform panel linking.

Activate Single-Partition, Single-Panel Mode = User Code + [#] + 86.

Exit Single-Partition, Single-Panel Mode = User Code + [#] + 85.

Activate Multi-Partition, Multi-Panel Mode = User Code + [#] + 87.

Exit Multi-Partition, Multi-Panel Mode = Enter [0].

Activate Multi-Panel View Mode = User Code + [#] + 88.

Exit Multi-Panel View Mode = Enter [0].

C-1

APPENDIX C

Specifications

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP CONTROL

Physical: 18"H X 14-1/2"W X 4.3"D

Electrical:

Primary Power: From ADEMCO No. 1451 Transformer with enclosure; rated 18VAC, 72VA.

Backup Battery: 12VDC, 12AH min to 34.4AH max lead acid battery (gel type).

Alarm Power: 12VDC, 1.7 amps max for each Notification Appliance Circuit.

Aux. Standby Pwr 12VDC, 1 amp max.

Total Power Combined auxiliary standby and alarm currents must not exceed 2.3 amps.

Standby Time: 24 hours with 1 amp aux standby load or 60 hours with 205ma aux. Standby load

using 34.4AH battery.

Fusing: Battery input, auxiliary and Notification Appliance Circuits are protected using PTC

circuit protectors. All outputs are power limited.

Main Dialer

Line Seize: Double Pole

Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

FCC Registration No.: AC3-USA-68192-AL-E

TLM Threshold Good line when tip-to-ring voltage greater than approximately 25V (13 when blue

jumper cut) or when handset current greater than approximately 10ma. Bad line

when both voltage and current below these levels.

Formats: ADEMCO High Speed, ADEMCO 4 + 2 Express, ADEMCO Low Speed, ADEMCO

Contact ID, Sescoa and Radionics Low Speed

Agency Listings:

Burglary: UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises and Mercantile Safe and Vault.

UL611/UL1610 Grades A, AA Central Station.

UL365 Grades A, AA Police Connect.

Fire: UL864-NFPA 72 Local, Central Station, and Remote Station

5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE

Physical: 2.75”H X 4”W X 1”D

Mounts on VISTA-128FB main PC board shield using standoffs supplied.

Connects to VISTA-128FB main PC board J3 header using ribbon cable supplied.

FCC Registration: AC3-USA-62628-MO-N

5140LED ANNUNCIATOR MODULE

Physical: 4.5”H X 2.75”W X 1.5”D

Mounts to single-gang electrical box.

Indicators: AC Power, Comm Failure, Dialer 1 Fault and Dialer 2 Fault.

Connect indicator inputs to VISTA-128FB trigger outputs (J2 header).

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

C-2

Remote Keypads

6139(R)

Physical:

Width: 6.25 inches

Height: 4.75 inches

Depth: 1.25 inches

Electrical:

Voltage Input: 12VDC

Current Drain: 100mA

Interface Wiring:

RED: 12VDC input (+) auxiliary

power

BLUE: Not Used

GREEN: Data to control panel

YELLOW: Data from control panel

BLACK: Ground and (-) connection from

supplemental power supply

6160CR

Physical:

Width: 7.437 inches

Height: 5.25 inches

Depth: 1.312 inches

Electrical:

Voltage Input: 12VDC

Current Drain: 150mA

Interface Wiring:

RED: 12VDC input (+) auxiliary

power

BLUE: Not Used

GREEN: Data to control panel

YELLOW: Data from control panel

BLACK: Ground and (-) connection from

supplemental power supply

D-1

APPENDIX D

Contact ID and Pager Event Codes

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES

Code Definition

110 Fire Alarm

111 Smoke Alarm

121 Duress

122 Silent Panic

123 Audible Panic

124 Duress Access Grant

125 Duress Egress Grant

131 Perimeter Burglary

132 Interior Burglary

133 24-Hour Burglary

134 Entry/Exit Burglary

135 Day/Night Burglary

140 ACS Zone Alarm

142 Polling Loop Short Alarm

150 24-Hour Auxiliary

200 Fire Supervisory

301 AC Loss

302 Low System Battery

305 System Reset

306 Program Tamper

308 System Shutdown

309 Battery Test Fail

310 Ground Fault

313 System Engineer Reset

320 ACS Relay Supervision

321 Bell 1 Trouble

322 Bell 2 Trouble

332 Poll Loop Short-Trouble

333 Expansion Module Failure

338 ACS Module Low Battery

339 ACS Module Reset

342 ACS Module AC Loss

343 ACS Module Self-Test Fail

351 Main Dialer Trouble

352 Backup Dialer Trouble

354 ACS RS232 Fail

373 Fire Loop Trouble

378 Cross Zone Trouble

380 Trouble (global)

381 Loss of Supervision (RF)

382 Loss of RPM Supervision

383 RPM Sensor Tamper

384 RF Transmitter Low Battery

Code Definition

385 High Sensitivity Maintenance Signal

386 Low Sensitivity Maintenance Signal

389 Detector Self-Test Failed

401 O/C by User

403 Power-Up Armed/Auto-Arm

406 Cancel by User

407 Remote Arm/Disarm (Download)

408 Quick Arm

409 Keyswitch O/C

411 Callback Requested

421 Access Denied

422 Access Granted

423 Door Force Open

424 Egress Denied

425 Egress Granted

426 Door Prop Open

427 Access Point DSM Trouble

428 Access Point RTE Trouble

429 ACS Program Entry

430 ACS Program Exit

431 ACS Threat Change

432 Access Point Relay/Trigger Fail

433 Access Point RTE Shunt

434 Access Point DSM Shunt/Unshunt

441 Armed STAY

451 Early Open/Close

452 Late Open/Close

453 Fail to Open

454 Fail to Close

455 Auto-Arm Fail

457 Exit Error by User

459 Recent Close

501 ACS Reader Disable

520 ACS Relay Disable

521 Bell 1 Bypass

522 Bell 2 Bypass

524 Auxiliary Relay Bypass

551 Main/Backup Dialer Bypass

570 Bypass

576 ACS Zone Shunt

577 ACS Point Bypass

579 Vent Zone Bypass

602 Communicator Test

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

D-2

Code Definition

604 Fire Test

606 Listen-In to Follow

607 Burglary Walk-Test

608 Off-Normal

611 Fire Walk-Test – Point Tested

612 Fire Walk-Test – Point Not Tested

621 Event Log Reset

Code Definition

622 Event Log 50% Full

623 Event Log 90% Full

624 Event Log Overflow

625 Time/Date Reset

631 Exception Schedule Change

632 Access Schedule Change

Event Log and Pager Alpha Descriptors

Alpha Event Description

FIRE Fire Alarm

DURESS Duress Alarm

PANIC Silent or Audible Panic Alarm

BURGLARY Burglary Alarm

EXP SHRT Polling Loop Short

RF EXPND Expander Module Failure

AUXILIARY Non-burglary Alarm

TROUBLE Trouble

AC LOSS AC Loss

LOW BATTERY System Low Battery

SYSTEM RESET System Reset

PROG CHANGE Program Change

BATTERY FAIL System Battery Failure

RF SUPR RF Supervision

RPM SUPR RPM Supervision

RF LBAT RF Low Battery

EXP TRBL Expander Module Trouble

RF TRBL RF Trouble

TAMPER Tamper

FIRE TRB Fire Trouble

FAIL TO COMM Failure to Communicate

BELL TROUBLE Bell Trouble

DISARMED Disarmed

DISARMED-REM Disarmed Remotely

DISARMED-KEY Disarmed Via RF Key

DISARM-AUTO Auto-Disarm

CALL BACK Callback Requested

CANCEL Cancel

DISRMD-EARLY Disarmed Early

DISRMD-LATE Disarmed Late

MISSED DISRM Missed Disarm

SKED CHANGE Schedule Change

ACC SKED CHG Access Control Schedule Change

ARM FAILED Failed to Arm

DIALER SHUT Dialer Shutdown

SYSTEM SHUT System Shutdown

Alpha Event Description

BYPASS Bypass

SELF TEST Self-test

TEST ENTRY Manual Test Entry

TEST EXIT Manual Test Exit

LOG 50% FULL Event Log 50% Full

LOG 90% FULL Event Log 90% Full

LOG OVERFLOW Event Log Overflow

LOG CLEARED Event Log Cleared

TIME SET Time Set

TIME ERROR Time Error

PROGRM ENTRY Program Entry

PROGRAM EXIT Program Exit

Uxxx ADD BY User XXX Added BY

Uxxx DEL BY User XXX Deleted BY

Uxxx CHG BY User XXX Changed BY

PRINTER FAIL Event Log Printer Failure

PAGER FAILED Pager Failure

TESTED Zone Tested

UNTESTED Zone Untested

FAILED Zone Test Failed

RLY TRBL Relay Trouble

EXP TMPR Expansion Module Tamper

VENT BYPASS Vent Zone Bypass

RF JAM RF Jam Detected

JAM RSTR RF Jam Restore

FIRE RST Fire Alarm Restore

DURE RST Duress Alarm Restore

PNC RST Panic Alarm Restore

BURG RST Burglary Alarm Restore

EXP RST Expansion Module Restore

RF RST RF Restore

AUX RST Auxiliary Restore

MED RST Medical Restore

TRBL RST Trouble Restore

AC RESTORE AC Restore

LOW BATT RST System Low Battery Restore

Appendix D – Contact ID and Pager Event Codes

D-3

Alpha Event Description

RESET

PROG CHANGE Program Change

BAT TST FAIL Battery Test Failure

RPM RST RPM Restore

RFLB RST RF Low Battery Restore

EXP RST Expansion Module Failure Restore

TMPR RST Tamper Restore

FRTR RST Fire Trouble Restore

COMM RESTORE Communication Restore

RLY RST ECP Relay Trouble Restore

ARMED Armed

ARMED-STAY Armed Stay

ARMED-REM Armed Remotely

ARMED-QUICK Quick Armed

ARMED-KEY Armed Via RF Key

ARMED-AUTO Auto-Armed

PARTIAL ARM Partial Armed

ARMED-EARLY Armed Early

ARMED-LATE Armed Late

MISSED ARM Missed Arm

DIALER RST Dialer Restore (Shutdown)

SYSTEM RST System Restore (Shutdown)

BYP RST Bypass Restore

TEST EXIT Test Mode Exit

PRINTER RSTR Printer Restore

PAGER RSTR Pager Restore

BELL RESTORE Bell Restore

EXIT ERR Exit Error

RECENT ARM Recent Arm

VENT BYP RST Vent Zone Bypass Restore

Access Control Events

ACS MOD VGM/Access Control Module Failure

ACS PNT Access Point Failure

DSM SHNT Door Status Monitor Shunt

DUR ACCS Duress Access Grant

NO ENTRY Access Denied

DR OPEN Door Propped Open

DR FORCE Door Forced Open

ENTERED Access Granted

NO EXIT Egress Denied

ACPT BYP Access Point Bypass

RTE SHNT Request to Exit Shunt

Alpha Event Description

EXITED Egress Granted

ACLO MOD AC Loss at Module

LBAT MOD Low Battery at Module

COMM MOD Comm Failure from MLB to Module

RES MOD Access Control Module Reset

ACPT RLY Access Point Relay Supervision Fail

SELF MOD Module Self-Test Failure

ACZN CHG Access Control Zone Change

ACS PROG Access Control Program Entry

ACS PRGX Access Control Program Exit

THRT CHG Access Control Threat Change

SYS SHUT System Shutdown

SYS RST System Engineer Reset

ZN SHUNT Access Control Zone Shunt

ZN ALARM Access Control Zone Alarm

RDR DISA Access Control Reader Disable

RLY DISA Access Control Relay/Trigger Disable

RTE TRBL Request to Exit Point Trouble

DSM TRBL Door Status Monitor Point Trouble

DUR EXIT Duress Egress Grant

BGN ACS TEST Access Control Test Mode Start

MOD RST VGM/Access Control Module Restore

ACPT RST Access Point Restore

ACRST MOD AC Loss at Module Restore

LBAT RST Low Battery at Module Restore

COMM RST Comm Fail MLB to Module Restore

RLY RST Access Point Relay Supervision Rest

SELF RST Self-Test at Module Restore

ACPT UNB Access Point Unbypass

DSM UNSH Door Status Monitor Unshunt

RTE UNSH Request to Exit Point Unshunt

DRFO RST Door Forced Open Restore

DRPO RST Door Propped Open Restore

DSM RST Door Status Monitor Trouble Restore

RTE RST Request to Exit Point Trouble Rest

RLY ENAB Access Control Relay/Trigger Enable

RDR ENAB Access Control Reader Enable

ZNAL RST Access Control Zone Restore

ZN UNSHT Access Control Zone Unshunt

SYSHTRST System Shutdown Restore

END ACS TEST Access Control Test Mode End

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

D-4

Index-1

Index

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

#93 Menu Mode Programming...................................... 4-2

#93 Menu Mode Programming Commands................... 4-4

12/24 Hour Type Stamp Format.................................. 5-11

1361 ............................................................................ 3-30

1451 Transformer..........................................................C-1

24-hour Audible Alarm Type 07..................................... 4-6

24-hour Auxiliary Alarm Type 08 ................................... 4-6

24-hour Silent Alarm Type 06........................................ 4-6

2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors............... 3-10, 3-11

2-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................................... 3-8

333 PRM ....................................................................... 3-9

4100SM Serial Module .................................................. 7-4

4101SN Relay Modules............................................... 3-18

4197 Polling Loop Extender ........................................ 3-13

4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules............................... 3-17

4285/4286 VIP Module................................................ 3-27

4297 Polling Loop Extender ........................................ 3-13

4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset....................................... 3-6

4-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................................... 3-8

5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE.........................C-1

5140LED ANNUNCIATOR MODULE............................C-1

5800 Series Transmitters ............................................ 3-16

5800TM Module .......................................................... 3-16

5869 ..................................................................... 1-2, 3-14

5881ENHC ........................................................... 1-2, 3-14

6139 ..............................................................................C-2

7720 ............................................................................ 3-23

7720ULF...................................................................... 3-23

7920SE........................................................................ 3-23

AAV ............................................................................. 3-27

ABB1031 ....................................................................... 3-4

AC 60Hz or 50Hz ........................................................ 5-10

AC Loss Keypad Sounding............................................ 5-2

Access Group............................................................... 9-3

Access Control ............................................3-25, 3-26, 4-9

Access Control Commands....................................6-8, B-2

Access Control Dialer Enables...................................... 5-9

Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point............................ 4-9

Access Control of Lighting and Appliances ................. 4-10

Access Control Using RF Transmitter ........................... 4-9

ACCESS GRP PGM...................................................... 4-3

ACCESS POINT PGM................................................... 4-3

Access Point Type 27.................................................... 4-7

Access Relay Number................................................. 5-11

Access Schedules......................................................... 6-5

Action Code................................................................... 6-8

Action Specifier ............................................................. 6-8

Activation Time.............................................................. 6-8

Adding a User Code...................................................... 9-3

Adding an RF Key to a User Code ................................ 9-4

Addressing the Keypads................................................ 3-3

ADEMCO 4+2 Express.................................................. 3-7

ADEMCO 4+2 EXPRESS..............................................C-1

ADEMCO 4146............................................................ 3-19

ADEMCO 685 receiver.................................................. 3-7

ADEMCO 685 Receiver............................................... 3-27

Ademco AB12. .............................................................. 3-1

ADEMCO Contact ID.............................................. 3-6, 3-7

ADEMCO CONTACT ID................................................C-1

ADEMCO HIGH SPEED ...............................................C-1

ADEMCO Low Speed.................................................... 3-7

ADEMCO LOW SPEED ................................................C-1

Affects Lobby ......................................................... 2-2, 5-7

Agency Listings.............................................................C-1

Agency Statements ....................................................... A-1

Alarm Activation ............................................................ 3-5

Alarm Output Current Load ................................ 3-32, 3-33

Alarm Output Supervision ............................................. 3-4

Alarm Power..................................................................C-1

Allow Disarm Outside Window if Alarm Occurs........... 5-12

Allow Disarming Only During Arm/Disarm Windows ... 5-12

Alpha Pager Module............................................. 3-23, 4-8

ALPHA PROG............................................................... 4-3

Antenna Fault.............................................................. 3-22

Arm/Disarm Commands................................................ 6-8

Arm-Away Type 21........................................................ 4-7

Arms Lobby............................................................ 2-2, 5-7

Arm-STAY Type 20....................................................... 4-7

Audio Alarm Verification Module ................................. 3-27

Auto Arming .................................................................. 6-1

Auto Disarming.............................................................. 6-1

Auto-Arm Delay.................................................... 5-12, 6-1

Auto-Arm Warning......................................................... 6-1

Auto-Arm Warning Period ........................................... 5-12

Auto-Disarm Delay...................................................... 5-12

Aux. Standby Pwr..........................................................C-1

Auxiliary Power Current Load...................................... 3-32

Auxiliary Relay Connections.......................................... 3-5

Backup Battery..............................................................C-1

Battery Capacity Worksheet........................................ 3-34

Battery Selection Table............................................... 3-34

Battery Test................................................................. 10-1

Burglary Alarm Communicator Delay............................ 5-7

Burglary or RS232 Input................................................ 5-2

Burglary Trigger for Response Type 8 .......................... 5-3

Burglary Walk Test...................................................... 10-2

Button RF.................................................................... 3-16

Button RF (BR) Type 05................................................ 4-8

Bypass Commands ....................................................... 6-8

California State Fire Marshal......................................... A-2

Call Waiting Defeat...................................................... 5-10

Callback ........................................................................ 7-3

Callback Requested...................................................... 7-1

CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS......................A-4

Cancel Verify................................................................. 5-7

Changing a User Code.................................................. 9-4

Check Messages......................................................... 10-4

Checksum Verification................................................... 5-5

Code + TEST [5] ................................................ 10-1, 10-2

COMM FAILURE......................................................... 10-4

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

Index-2

Common Lobby............................................................. 2-1

Communication Defaults ............................................... 4-5

Communicator Split Reporting Selection....................... 5-9

Compass Downloading Software .................................. 7-4

COMPASS downloading software................................. 7-1

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................ 3-8

Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors ..................... 3-8, 3-9

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters ......................... 3-17

Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices............................ 3-4

Compatible Glass Break Detectors ............................. 3-11

Confirmation of Arming Ding ......................................... 5-2

Console Input (CS) Type 09.......................................... 4-8

Contact ID ..................................................................... 1-3

CONTACT ID EVENT CODES......................................D-1

Contacting Technical Support ..................................... 10-5

Control Unit Power Supply Load ................................. 3-31

Conventions Used in This Manual................................... vii

Cross Zoning Pair Four ................................................. 5-8

Cross Zoning Pair One.................................................. 5-8

Cross Zoning Pair Three ............................................... 5-8

Cross Zoning Pair Two.................................................. 5-8

Cross-Zoning................................................................. 5-8

CUSTOM INDEX........................................................... 4-3

Data Encryption............................................................. 7-1

Data Field Descriptions ................................................. 5-1

Data Field Programming Mode...................................... 4-1

Daylight Saving Time Start/End Month........................ 5-11

Daylight Saving Time Start/End Weekend.......... 5-12, 5-17

Deleting a User Code.................................................... 9-5

DEVICE PROG ............................................................. 4-3

Dial Tone Detection....................................................... 5-4

Dial Tone Pause............................................................ 5-4

Dialer Test................................................................... 10-1

DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR .........................................C-1

DIP Switch Loop (DP) Type 07...................................... 4-8

Direct-Wire Downloading............................................... 7-4

Disable Download Callback......................................... 5-10

Disarm Delay................................................................. 6-1

Disarm Type 22............................................................. 4-7

Display Burglary & Panic Alarms for Other Partitions.. 5-13

Display Fire Alarms of Other Partitions ....................... 5-13

Display Troubles of Other Partitions............................ 5-13

Door Status Monitor (DSM) Type 11 ............................. 4-8

Download Command Enables....................................... 5-4

Download ID Number.................................................... 5-4

Download Phone Number ............................................. 5-4

Downloading.................................................................. 7-1

Downloading Access Security....................................... 7-1

Downloading Requirements .......................................... 7-1

Dual Reporting .............................................................. 5-5

Duress Codes Level 6................................................... 9-2

Duress Reporting .......................................................... 9-2

Dynamic Signaling Delay...................................... 3-21, 5-6

Dynamic Signaling Priority.................................... 3-21, 5-6

Early Power Detect...................................................... 3-22

Earth Ground............................................................... 3-31

ECP Wire Run............................................................. 3-20

Enable 5800 RF Button Force Arm ............................. 5-11

Enable 5800 RF Button Global Arm ............................ 5-11

Enable Dialer Reports for Panics & Duress................... 5-6

Enable GOTO for this Partition.................................... 5-12

Enable J7 Triggers for Partition................................... 5-13

Enable Open/Close Report for Installer Code............... 5-4

Enable Open/Close report for Keyswitch....................... 5-4

Enable Random Timers For Partitions 1-8 .................... 5-1

Entering Programming Mode ........................................ 4-1

Entry Delay #1............................................................... 5-2

Entry Delay #2............................................................... 5-2

Entry Warning ............................................................... 5-6

Entry/Exit #1 Type 01.................................................... 4-6

Entry/Exit #2 Type 02.................................................... 4-6

Event Log........................................................... 3-27, 4-10

Event Log and Pager Alpha Descriptors .......................D-2

Event Log Printer On-Line Mode................................. 5-11

Event Log Types ......................................................... 5-11

Event Logging Commands............................................ B-1

EVENT/ACTION PGM............................................ 4-3, 4-4

Exception Reports......................................................... 6-2

Exit Delay #1................................................................. 5-2

Exit Delay #2................................................................. 5-2

Exit Delay Sounding.................................................... 5-10

Exit Error ....................................................................... 1-2

Exit Error Logic Enable.................................................. 5-7

Exiting the User Edit Mode............................................ 9-5

EXPERT MODE ............................................................ 4-3

Extend Closing Window ................................................ 6-1

External Sounders......................................................... 3-4

FCC Part 15 STATEMENT............................................A-3

FCC PART 68 NOTICE.................................................A-3

FCC REGISTRATION NO.............................................C-1

Fire With Verification Type 16 ....................................... 4-7

First Communication ..................................................... 7-3

First Test Report Time................................................... 5-6

Force Arm ..................................................................... 6-1

Force Arm Enable for Auto-Arm.................................. 5-12

Frwd. Power Loss........................................................ 3-22

FSA Modules............................................................... 3-18

Fusing ...........................................................................C-1

General Description....................................................... 1-1

General Purpose (GP) Type 13..................................... 4-8

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel............................ 7-2

Global Arm ? ................................................................. 9-3

Go/No Go Test Mode .................................................. 10-1

Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing ............................ 3-1

Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing.................... 3-2

Grade A Service............................................................A-2

Grade AA Service.......................................................... A-2

Hardwire and Optional Expansion Zones...................... 1-1

Hardwired (HW) Type 01............................................... 4-7

Holiday Schedule Programming.................................... 6-7

Holiday Schedules...........................................6-3, 6-4, 6-6

House ID Sniffer Mode................................................ 3-16

How to Use Panel Linking ............................................. B-2

Index

Index-3

Ignore Expansion Zone Tamper.................................... 5-3

Installer (User 1) Code Level 0...................................... 9-1

Installer Code................................................................ 5-1

Installer Unattended Program Mode.............................. 7-2

Installing RPM Devices................................................ 3-12

Installing The Control .................................................... 3-1

Installing the Control's Circuit Board.............................. 3-2

Intelligent Test Report ................................................... 5-3

Interior w/Delay Type 10................................................ 4-7

Interior, Follower Type 04.............................................. 4-6

Keypad Panic Enables .................................................. 5-3

Keypads ........................................................................ 2-1

Keyswitch.................................................................... 3-19

Keyswitch Assignment................................................... 5-2

Keyswitch Tamper....................................................... 3-19

Limitation of Access Schedules............................ 6-2, 6-11

Limitation Of Access Schedules Programming............ 6-11

LINE SEIZE...................................................................C-1

List of Figures...................................................................vi

LO BAT........................................................................ 10-4

Lobby Partition .............................................................. 5-7

Long Range Radio Central Station #1 Category

Enable ....................................................................... 5-6

Long Range Radio Central Station #2 Category

Enable ....................................................................... 5-6

Long Range Radio ECP..................................... 3-21, 4-10

Long Range Radio to J7 Triggers................................ 3-23

Low Speed Format (Primary) ........................................ 5-5

Low Speed Format (Secondary).................................... 5-5

LRR Battery................................................................. 3-22

LRR CRC is bad.......................................................... 3-22

LRR reporting options ................................................. 3-22

LRR Trouble Messages............................................... 3-22

Main Logic Board ........................................................ 3-26

Main Logic Board Supervision Type 28......................... 4-7

Manager Codes Level 2 ................................................ 9-1

Master Codes Level 1 ................................................... 9-1

Master Keypad .............................................................. 2-3

MODEM COMM ................................................... 7-1, 10-4

Modems......................................................................... 7-1

Momentary Exit Type 29................................................ 4-7

Mounting The Control Cabinet....................................... 3-1

Multi-Access ?............................................................... 9-3

Multi-Panel View Mode.................................................. 2-7

Multi-Partition Multi-Panel Mode.................................... 2-6

Multiple Alarms.............................................................. 5-3

Multiple Partition Access ............................................... 9-2

No Alarm Response Type 23 ........................................ 4-7

Normally Closed or EOLR (Zones 2-8).......................... 5-4

Number of Partitions.................................................... 5-11

OC or OPEN CIRCUIT.................................................. 3-3

Off-Normal Report....................................................... 10-4

On-Line Control Functions ............................................ 7-3

Open/Close Reporting................................................... 9-2

Open/Close Reports by Exception ....................... 5-12, 6-3

Open/Close Schedule ................................................... 6-3

Open/Close Schedule Programming............................. 6-6

Open/Close Schedules........................................... 6-4, 6-5

Open/Close Windows.................................................... 6-8

Operator Access Levels ................................................ 7-1

Operator Codes Levels 3-5 ........................................... 9-1

Output Device Control Commands................................B-1

Output Devices............................................................ 3-17

OUTPUT PGM .............................................................. 4-3

Overvoltage Protection.................................................. 3-7

PABX Access Code....................................................... 5-3

Pager 1 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-13

Pager 1 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-13

Pager 1 Format ........................................................... 5-13

Pager 1 ID Number ..................................................... 5-13

Pager 1 Partition Enable ............................................. 5-14

Pager 1 Phone Number............................................... 5-13

Pager 1 Trigger Event Enables .......................... 5-14, 5-17

Pager 2 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-14

Pager 2 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-14

Pager 2 Format ........................................................... 5-14

Pager 2 ID Number ..................................................... 5-14

Pager 2 Partition Enable ............................................. 5-14

Pager 2 Phone Number............................................... 5-14

Pager 2 Trigger Event Enables ................................... 5-14

Pager 3 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-14

Pager 3 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-14

Pager 3 Format ........................................................... 5-14

Pager 3 ID Number ..................................................... 5-14

Pager 3 Partition Enable ............................................. 5-14

Pager 3 Phone Number............................................... 5-14

Pager 3 Trigger Event Enables ................................... 5-15

Pager 4 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-15

Pager 4 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-15

Pager 4 Format ........................................................... 5-15

Pager 4 ID Number ..................................................... 5-15

Pager 4 Partition Enable ............................................. 5-15

Pager 4 Phone Number............................................... 5-15

Pager 4 Trigger Event Enables ................................... 5-15

Pager 5 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-15

Pager 5 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-15

Pager 5 Format ........................................................... 5-15

Pager 5 ID Number ..................................................... 5-15

Pager 5 Partition Enable ............................................. 5-15

Pager 5 Phone Number............................................... 5-15

Pager 5 Trigger Event Enables ................................... 5-15

Pager 6 Delay 1 .......................................................... 5-16

Pager 6 Delay 2 .......................................................... 5-16

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

Index-4

Pager 6 Format ........................................................... 5-16

Pager 6 ID Number ..................................................... 5-16

Pager 6 Partition Enable.............................................. 5-16

Pager 6 Phone Number............................................... 5-16

Pager 6 Trigger Event Enables ................................... 5-16

Pager 7 Delay 1.........................................5-16, 5-17, 5-18

Pager 7 Delay 2.........................................5-16, 5-17, 5-19

Pager 7 Format .........................................5-16, 5-17, 5-18

Pager 7 ID Number ...................................5-16, 5-17, 5-18

Pager 7 Partition Enable............................5-16, 5-17, 5-19

Pager 7 Phone Number.............................5-16, 5-17, 5-18

Pager 7 Trigger Event Enables .................5-16, 5-17, 5-19

Pager 8 Delay 1.................................................. 5-17, 5-18

Pager 8 Delay 2.................................................. 5-17, 5-18

Pager 8 Format .................................................. 5-17, 5-18

Pager 8 ID Number ............................................ 5-16, 5-18

Pager 8 Partition Enable..................................... 5-17, 5-18

Pager 8 Phone Number.............................5-16, 5-17, 5-19

Pager Format .............................................................. 3-23

Pager Installed ............................................................ 5-13

Paging Service ............................................................ 3-23

Panel Link Module................................................ 2-4, 3-20

Panel Link Module Supervision ..................................... 2-5

Panel Linking.......................................................... 2-4, 4-8

Panel Linking Commands..............................................B-2

panel linking users.................................................. 2-5, 9-1

Panic Button or Speedkey............................................. 5-9

Partitioned System ........................................................ 2-1

Partitioning ............................................................. 1-2, 2-1

PassPoint Access Control (ACS) Type 10..................... 4-8

PassPoint Access Control System .............................. 3-26

PassPoint Dialer Events................................................ 4-9

Perimeter Type 03......................................................... 4-6

Peripherals Devices ...................................................... 1-2

Permanent Keypad Display Backlighting..................... 5-10

Phone Module Access Code......................................... 5-2

PLL out of Lock ........................................................... 3-22

PLM............................................................................... 2-4

polling loop.................................................................. 3-12

Polling Loop Current Draw .......................................... 3-32

Polling Loop Supervision............................................. 3-13

Power Failure .............................................................. 10-4

Power Unattained........................................................ 3-22

Power-Up in Previous State .......................................... 5-3

Prevent Zone XXX Bypass............................................ 5-4

Primary Format.............................................................. 5-5

Primary Phone Number................................................. 5-4

Primary Subscriber’s Account Number.......................... 5-3

Printer Baud Rate........................................................ 5-11

Printer Configurations.................................................. 3-27

Printer Type................................................................. 5-11

Priority of Displays for Panel Linking............................. 2-7

Program Modes............................................................. 4-1

Programming Commands..............................................B-1

PROGRAMMING COMMANDS .................................... 4-1

Programming Entry Errors............................................. 4-2

Programming Overview................................................. 4-1

Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields.................. 4-2

Programming Scheduling Options................................. 6-4

Programming System-Wide Data Fields........................ 4-2

Quick Arm...............................................................5-3, 9-1

Quick Exit...................................................................... 5-1

Random time................................................................. 6-8

Randomize AC Loss Report.......................................... 5-2

RCVR SETUP ERROR ............................................... 10-4

Real-Time Clock............................................................ 8-1

Recent Close................................................................. 1-2

Refresh Feature ............................................................ 6-7

Regulatory Agency Statements..................................... A-1

Relay commands........................................................... 6-8

Relay Timeout XXX Minutes ....................................... 5-11

Relay Timeout YYY Seconds...................................... 5-11

REPORT CODE PROG ................................................ 4-3

Reporting Formats......................................................... 3-7

Request to Exit (RTE) Type 12 ..................................... 4-8

Restore Report Timing .................................................. 5-7

Restrict Disarming......................................................... 6-1

RF Motion.................................................................... 3-16

RF Motion (RM) Type 02............................................... 4-7

RF Receiver Supervision Check-in Interval................... 5-9

RF System Installation Advisories............................... 3-15

RF System Operation and Supervision....................... 3-14

RF Transmitter Check-in Interval .................................. 5-9

RF Transmitter Low Battery Reporting.......................... 5-9

RF Transmitter Low Battery Sound............................... 5-9

Ring Count .................................................................... 7-2

Ring Detection Count .................................................... 5-5

RINGER EQUIVALENCE..............................................C-1

RJ31X ........................................................................... 3-7

RJ31X jack.................................................................. 3-28

RLY VOICE DESCR...................................................... 4-3

RS-485.......................................................................... 2-4

RS-485 Bus................................................................. 3-21

RTE............................................................................... 4-8

Scheduled Check-in...................................................... 7-3

Scheduled Download .................................................... 7-3

Scheduling .................................................................... 6-1

Scheduling Commands .................................................B-2

Scheduling Menu Mode................................................. 6-4

Scheduling Menu Structure........................................... 6-4

Secondary Format......................................................... 5-5

Secondary Phone Number............................................ 5-4

Secondary Subscriber Account Number ....................... 5-7

Send Cancel If Alarm + Off.......................................... 5-10

Send Message to Pager After Dialer........................... 5-13

serial number devices ................................................. 3-13

Serial Number Polling Loop (DS) Type 08 .................... 4-8

Serial Number Polling Loop (SL) Type 06..................... 4-8

SESCOA .......................................................................C-1

Sescoa/Radionics.......................................................... 3-7

Sescoa/Radionics Select............................................... 5-5

Single-Partition Single-Panel Mode............................... 2-5

Smoke Detector Reset ................................................ 3-20

Specifications................................................................C-1

Standard/Expanded Reporting Primary......................... 5-5

Standard/Expanded Reporting Secondary.................... 5-5

Standby Battery Size................................................... 3-33

Supervised Fire (Without Verification) Type 09............. 4-7

Supervised RF ............................................................ 3-16

Supervised RF (RF) Type 03 ........................................ 4-8

Supervision Pulses for LRR ........................................ 5-13

Index

Index-5

Supervisory Messages ................................................ 10-4

Supplementary Power Supply....................................... 3-3

Suppress Transmitter Supervision Sound ................... 5-10

Swinger Suppression .................................................... 5-6

System Commands.......................................................B-1

System Communication................................................. 1-3

System Events Notify .................................................... 5-1

SYSTEM LO BAT........................................................ 10-4

System LoBat”............................................................. 10-1

System Messages....................................................... 10-4

System Sensor A77-716B EOL Relay Module .............. 3-9

System Sensor MA 12/24D ........................................... 3-4

System Sensor P12575................................................. 3-4

Tamper Supervision .................................................... 3-11

TAP protocol................................................................ 3-23

Telephone Line Connections......................................... 3-7

TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS .................A-3

TeleSmart...................................................................... 4-8

Temporary Schedule..................................................... 6-3

Temporary Schedules ................................................. 6-12

Temporary Schedules Programming........................... 6-13

Test Report Interval....................................................... 5-3

Testing The System .................................................... 10-1

Time Driven Events....................................................... 6-2

Time Driven Events Worksheet..................................... 6-7

Time to Delay Pager After Dialer................................. 5-13

Time Window Definitions............................................... 6-2

Time Windows........................................................ 6-4, 6-5

Time Windows Programming ........................................ 6-5

Timed Events ................................................................ 6-4

Time-Driven Event Programming .................................. 6-9

Time-Driven Events....................................................... 6-7

Time-Driven Events Programming ................................ 6-7

TouchTone or Rotary Dial ............................................. 5-3

TouchTone with Rotary Backup .................................... 5-9

Transformer Connections............................................ 3-30

Transmitter Battery Life ............................................... 3-17

Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode ........................................ 10-1

Transmitter Input Types............................................... 3-16

Transmitter Supervision............................................... 3-16

Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night Type 05........................ 4-6

Trouble Conditions ...................................................... 10-4

Trouble Messages....................................................... 10-4

Trouble/Supervisory Activation...................................... 3-6

Turning the System Over to the User .......................... 10-5

UL Installation Requirements ........................................A-1

UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm............A-2

UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local

Mercantile Safe & Vault.............................................A-1

UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm.............A-2

UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire.A-1

UL864/NFPA Local Fire.................................................A-1

UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION........................ 2-2

Unattended Download................................................... 7-1

Unattended Mode.......................................................... 5-5

Unsupervised RF......................................................... 3-16

Unsupervised RF (UR) Type 04.................................... 4-8

Use Partition Descriptor .............................................. 5-12

User Access Codes....................................................... 9-1

User Code Authority Levels........................................... 9-1

User Code Commands..................................................B-1

user code defaults......................................................... 9-1

User Code Rules........................................................... 9-2

User Scheduling Menu Mode ...................................... 6-13

Users............................................................................. 2-1

Using ACS Zone Inputs................................................. 4-9

VA8200 ................................................................ 2-4, 3-20

VA8201 ....................................................................... 3-23

View Capabilities........................................................... 9-1

VIP Module.................................................................. 3-27

VIP Module Phone Code............................................... 5-2

Vista Gateway Module ................................................ 3-26

VISTA Gateway Module................................................ 4-9

VISTA-128B Plus as Stand-Alone Access Control...... 4-10

VISTA-128B PLUS Current Load ................................ 3-33

VistaKey............................................................... 3-25, 4-9

VistaKey Dialer Enables................................................ 4-9

Wire Run Length ......................................................... 3-20

Wire Run Length/Gauge................................................ 3-3

Wireless Keypad Assignment...................................... 5-10

Wireless Keypad Tamper Detect................................. 5-10

Wireless System Commands ........................................ B-1

Wireless Zone Expansion............................................ 3-14

Wiring Devices to Zones 1-9 ......................................... 3-8

Wiring the Alarm Output................................................ 3-4

Wiring the Keypads ....................................................... 3-3

Worksheets to calculate the total current .................... 3-31

World Wide Web Address ........................................... 10-5

Yuasa.......................................................................... 3-34

Zone 5 Audio Alarm Verification.................................. 5-11

Zone 804..................................................................... 3-28

Zone Defaults................................................................ 4-4

Zone Index .................................................................... 4-4

Zone Input Type Definitions .......................................... 4-7

Zone Number Designations........................................... 4-4

ZONE PROG............................................................vii, 4-3

Zone Response Type Definitions .................................. 4-6

Zone Type Restores for Zone Types 1-8....................... 5-6

Zone Type Restores for Zone Types 9, 10 and 16........ 5-6

Zones ............................................................................ 2-1

VISTA-128FBP/VISTA-250FBP Installation and Setup Guide

Index-6

WARNING!

THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM

While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary, fire or

other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a vari-

ety of reasons. For example:

• Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or

disconnect an alarm warning device.

• Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will not work with-

out power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the batteries are not put in

properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason, however briefly.

• Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even if

the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path.

• A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.

• While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they may not acti-

vate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, according to data published by the

Federal Emergency Management Agency. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System may

not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned. Smoke detectors may not

sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side

of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building. A second floor de-

tector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have sensing limitations. No

smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not always warn about fires caused by

carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable

materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending on the nature of the fire

and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may not provide sufficient warning

to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death.

• Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their

installation manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple beams

of protection, and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot detect motion

or intrusion that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or windows.

Mechanical tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows or any part of the optical

system can reduce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however, as the

ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90° to 105°F (32° to 40°C), the detection

performance can decrease.

• Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the

other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bed-

rooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake may not hear

the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic.

Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearing-impaired people.

• Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or

temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders.

• Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to protect them-

selves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond appropriately.

• This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is designed to

last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time.

The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance. This

alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly. The security keypad

(and remote keypad) should be tested as well.

Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions.

Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device

being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may all

reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low battery situation,

thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system.

Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a substitute

for insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and

continue to insure their lives and property. We continue to develop new and improved protection devices. Users of alarm

systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments.

ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY

Alarm Device Manufacturing Company, a Division of Pittway Corporation, and its divisions, subsidiaries

and affiliates ("Seller"), 165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791, warrants its products to be in

conformance with its own plans and specifications and to be free from defects in materials and workmanship

under normal use and service for 24 months from the date stamp control on the product or, for products not

having an ADEMCO date stamp, for 12 months from date of original purchase unless the installation

instructions or catalog sets forth a shorter period, in which case the shorter period shall apply. Seller's

obligation shall be limited to repairing or replacing, at its option, free of charge for materials or labor, any

product which is proved not in compliance with Seller's specifications or proves defective in materials or

workmanship under normal use and service. Seller shall have no obligation under this Limited Warranty or

otherwise if the product is altered or improperly repaired or serviced by anyone other than ADEMCO factory

service. For warranty service, return product transportation prepaid, to ADEMCO Factory Service, 170

Michael Drive, Syosset, New York 11791.

THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE

FACE HEREOF. IN NO CASE SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL

OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, OR UPON ANY OTHER BASIS OF LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, EVEN IF THE LOSS OR

DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY THE SELLER'S OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT.

Seller does not represent that the products it sells may not be compromised or circumvented; that the

products will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary, robbery, fire or otherwise; or that the

products will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection. Customer understands that a properly

installed and maintained alarm may only reduce the risk of a burglary, robbery, fire or other events

occurring without providing an alarm, but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not occur or that

there will be no personal injury or property loss as a result. CONSEQUENTLY, SELLER SHALL HAVE NO

LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON A

CLAIM THE PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING. HOWEVER, IF SELLER IS HELD LIABLE,

WHETHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING UNDER THIS

LIMITED WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE, REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR ORIGIN, SELLER'S MAXIMUM

LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, WHICH

SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST SELLER. This warranty replaces

any previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this product. No increase or alteration,

written or verbal, of the obligations of this Limited Warranty is authorized.

NOTES

TRANSFORMER

W/ENCLOSURE

ADEMCO No.1451

(supplied)

INPUT: 120VAC,

60HZ,

1.0A max. Connect to a

dedicated circuit.

See instructions for

proper earth ground

connections

ZONE 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617181920 21222324 25 26 27 30

SMOKE

PROGRAMMABLE

AS KEYSWITCH LOOP

PROGRAMMABLE

AS TAMPER LOOP

2-WIRE GLASS BREAK

DETECTOR LOOP

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR LOOP

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR LOOP

N.C.

N.O.

2k (note 2)

N.C.

N.O.

GLASS

BREAK

REMOTE KEYPADS:

6139, 6139R

6160, 6160R

SEE NOTE 3

Red Blk Grn Yel

Data in

Data out

BACK-UP LINE SEIZE

LED (GREEN)

Connect to main PCB

header J3 using ribbon

cable (supplied)

BACK-UP TLM ON HOOK

VOLTAGE THRESHOLD (BLUE)

INTACT: 25V

CUT: 13V

OPTIONAL 5140DLM BACK-UP DIALER MODULE

MAIN PCB SHIELD

BACK-UP PHONE JACK

SEE TELCO

JACK SHOCK

WARNING

BELOW

Make connections using

4142TR cable (not supplied)

VOLTAGE

TRIGGERS

(not supervised)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Make connections using

4142TR cable (supplied)

(not supervised)

KEYPAD PORT #2

BELL 1

(WHITE)

BELL 2

(WHITE)

BELL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION JUMPERS

INTACT: Supervised using 2k EOLR

CUT: Not supervised (no EOLR used)

BLK + RED

OPTIONAL REMOVABLE

TERMINAL BLOCK KIT:

ADEMCO NO. 4142BLK

BELL

HORN

BELL

HORN

SMOKE

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

TO OTHER DEVICES

2k 2k 2k 2k 2k

ZONE 1 ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8

NOTE 3:

See instructions on setting

addresses & for max # of keypads

and wire run length restrictions.

Keypad color subject to approval

of local authority.

2k (note 2) 2k

AC WIRING IS

SUPERVISED

BELL 1 BELL 2

ALARM POLARITY SHOWN

Each output may be selected for

Style Y supervision or no supervision

(See main PCB jumpers W1, W4 and

#93 Menu Mode.

FIRE CKTS: Supervise using 2k EOLR.

Use polarized sounding devices.

BURG CKTS: Supervision not req'd.

EOLRs not req'd. May use non

polarized devices.

Ratings: 10 - 14VDC, 1.7A max.

See note 1, see instructions

for compatible devices.

N.O.

POLE

N.C.

AUX RELAY (FORM C)

programmable response

(not supervised)

Contact Rating:

28V, 2.8A

resistive loads

SPARE AUX

POWR #1

AUXILIARY POWER #1

Rating: 10 - 14VDC

1.0A MAX (STANDBY)

1.7A MAX (ALARM)

See note 1.

(not supervised)

NOTE 1:

The combined standby current

drawn from aux pwr #1, aux pwr #2

and polling loop cannot exceed

1.0A.The combined alarm current

drawn from aux pwr #1, aux

pwr #2, polling loop, bell 1 and

bell 2 cannot exceed 2.3A. ZONE 1-8 NOTES

• All zones provide Style B supervision

• Zone resistance (excluding EOLR):

- Zones 1, 2, 8: 100 ohms max

- Other zones: 300 ohms max

• Zone response: 350 - 500mS (all zones)

Connect to 12V, 12AH min/34.4AH max

lead acid batteries using cables supplied.

See instructions for required capacity.

Float charging voltage: 13.7VDC. Battery

normally need not be replaced for

at least 3 yrs.

J4 KEYPAD PORT #2

See instr. regarding port #2 use

1. GROUND (to keypad black wire)

4. DATA IN 2 (to keypad green wire)

5. AUX PWR #2 (to keypad red wire)

Rating: 10 - 14 VDC,

400mA max. See note 1

7. DATA OUT 2 (to keypad yellow wire)

(BLUE)

INTERFACE TO 5140DLM

MAIN TLM ON HOOK

VOLTAGE THRESHOLD

INTACT:25V

CUT: 13V

BACK-UP DIALER EARTH

GROUND SCREW

(wire to main PCB

terminal #30)

J2 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS

See instructions for trigger use and programming

(default functions shown)

1. OUT 4 (SILENT PANIC/DURESS)

2. OUT 7 (TROUBLE)

3. OUT 3 (BURGLARY/AUDIBLE PANIC)

4. OUT 6 (SUPERVISORY)

5. OUT 2 (FIRE)

6. OUT 5 (REMOTE KEYPAD SOUNDER)

7. OUT 1 (OPEN/CLOSE)

8. GROUND

9. IN 1 (N.O. LOOP)

RATINGS: OUT 1, 5, 7:

LOW: 2K TO GROUND

HIGH: 10 - 14VDC, 20mA MAX

OTHER OUTS: LOW: 1K TO GROUND

HIGH: 10 - 14VDC THRU 5K

Attach 5140DLM module to main PCB shield using

4 standoffs (supplied)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

BATTERY TABS

PINS 2, 3, 6, 8 & 9 NOT USED

RJ31X

MAIN

PHONE JACK

BELL OUTPUTS AUX. RELAY KEYPAD PORT #1

INPUT

OUTPUT

NOTE 2:

2k EOLR is Ademco model 610-7

CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM

SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD-

QUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION

SHALL BE PERMITTED ONLY WITH

THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL

AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.

THE BURGLARY ALARM SIGNAL

SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A

POLICE EMERGENCY NUMBER.

POLLING

LOOP

WARNING:

TO PREVENT

RISK OF

ELECTRICAL

SHOCK,

DISCONNECT

TELCO JACK

BEFORE

SERVICING

THIS PANEL

Connect

RJ31X using

cable supplied.

Supervision is

programmable

TYPES OF FIRE SIGNALLING SERVICE:

Manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm, sprinkler supervisory and waterflow alarm. UL Listed local control (non-coded).

UL Listed central station and remote station protected premises unit when used with 5140DLM back-up dialer module.

Installation limits under jurisdiction of local authority.

CIRCUIT

(ZONE) CONTROL UNIT

DELAY-SEC SMOKE DETECTOR

MODEL DELAY-SEC

THE DELAY TIME MARKED ON THE INSTALLED

DETECTOR(S) IS TO BE USED

Polling Loop

Ratings:

(supervised)

128mA max. See note 1.

See instructions for

compatible devices

and for max wire

run length

OUTPUT: 18VAC

72VA

BLACKWH

RJ31X

(connect using supplied cable)

Supervision is programmable

EARTH GROUND

• Ratings for zones 1,2:

- 10 - 14VDC

- 2mA max for smoke det. (up to 16 detectors

of the type specified in the instructions

can be used)

• UL compatibility ID: A

Do not mix fire and burg. sensors on one loop.

N.C. contacts for burg. usage only.

NOTES

TRNSFMR

ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED EXCEPT

THE OUTPUT OF THE 1451 TRANSFORMER

TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY

The 5140DLM Dialer

Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68

FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68628-MO-N

Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

WARNING:

THIS UNIT MAY BE PROGRAMMED TO

INCLUDE AN ALARM VERIFICATION

FEATURE THAT WILL RESULT IN A DELAY

OF THE SYSTEM ALARM SIGNAL FROM

THE INDICATED FIRE CIRCUITS. THE

TOTAL DELAY (CONTROL UNIT PLUS

SMOKE DETECTORS) SHALL NOT EXCEED

60 SECONDS. NO OTHER INITIATING

DEVICES SHALL BE CONNECTED TO

THESE CIRCUITS UNLESS APPROVED BY

THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING

JURISDICTION.

This equipment should be

installed in accordance

with the National Fire

Protection Association's

Standard 72 (National

Fire Protection Assoc.,

Batterymarch Park,

Quincy, MA. 02269). Printed

information describing proper

installation, operation,

testing, maintenance and

repair service is to be

provided with this equipment.

For commercial fire, bell timeout

must be a minimum of 6 minutes.

V128FBP-SOC-V0

VISTA-128FBP

SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS

4192SD

SMOKE

4209U

28 29

4208U

The VISTA-250 Main Dialer

Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68

FCC Reg. No.: AC3-USA-68192-AL-E

Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

VISTA-128FBP Summary of Connections Diagram

TRANSFORMER

W/ENCLOSURE

ADEMCO No.1451

(supplied)

INPUT: 120VAC,

60HZ,

1.0A max. Connect to a

dedicated circuit.

See instructions for

proper earth ground

connections

ZONE 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617181920 21222324 25 26 27 30

SMOKE

PROGRAMMABLE

AS KEYSWITCH LOOP

PROGRAMMABLE

AS TAMPER LOOP

2-WIRE GLASS BREAK

DETECTOR LOOP

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR LOOP

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR LOOP

N.C.

N.O.

2k (note 2)

N.C.

N.O.

GLASS

BREAK

REMOTE KEYPADS:

6139, 6139R

6160, 6160R

SEE NOTE 3

Red Blk Grn Yel

Data in

Data out

BACK-UP LINE SEIZE

LED (GREEN)

Connect to main PCB

header J3 using ribbon

cable (supplied)

BACK-UP TLM ON HOOK

VOLTAGE THRESHOLD (BLUE)

INTACT: 25V

CUT: 13V

OPTIONAL 5140DLM BACK-UP DIALER MODULE

MAIN PCB SHIELD

BACK-UP PHONE JACK

SEE TELCO

JACK SHOCK

WARNING

BELOW

Make connections using

4142TR cable (not supplied)

VOLTAGE

TRIGGERS

(not supervised)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Make connections using

4142TR cable (supplied)

(not supervised)

KEYPAD PORT #2

BELL 1

(WHITE)

BELL 2

(WHITE)

BELL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION JUMPERS

INTACT: Supervised using 2k EOLR

CUT: Not supervised (no EOLR used)

BLK + RED

OPTIONAL REMOVABLE

TERMINAL BLOCK KIT:

ADEMCO NO. 4142BLK

BELL

HORN

BELL

HORN

SMOKE

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

TO OTHER DEVICES

2k 2k 2k 2k 2k

ZONE 1 ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8

NOTE 3:

See instructions on setting

addresses & for max # of keypads

and wire run length restrictions.

Keypad color subject to approval

of local authority.

2k (note 2) 2k

AC WIRING IS

SUPERVISED

BELL 1 BELL 2

ALARM POLARITY SHOWN

Each output may be selected for

Style Y supervision or no supervision

(See main PCB jumpers W1, W4 and

#93 Menu Mode.

FIRE CKTS: Supervise using 2k EOLR.

Use polarized sounding devices.

BURG CKTS: Supervision not req'd.

EOLRs not req'd. May use non

polarized devices.

Ratings: 10 - 14VDC, 1.7A max.

See note 1, see instructions

for compatible devices.

N.O.

POLE

N.C.

AUX RELAY (FORM C)

programmable response

(not supervised)

Contact Rating:

28V, 2.8A

resistive loads

SPARE AUX

POWR #1

AUXILIARY POWER #1

Rating: 10 - 14VDC

1.0A MAX (STANDBY)

1.7A MAX (ALARM)

See note 1.

(not supervised)

NOTE 1:

The combined standby current

drawn from aux pwr #1, aux pwr #2

and polling loop cannot exceed

1.0A.The combined alarm current

drawn from aux pwr #1, aux

pwr #2, polling loop, bell 1 and

bell 2 cannot exceed 2.3A. ZONE 1-8 NOTES

• All zones provide Style B supervision

• Zone resistance (excluding EOLR):

- Zones 1, 2, 8: 100 ohms max

- Other zones: 300 ohms max

• Zone response: 350 - 500mS (all zones)

Connect to 12V, 12AH min/34.4AH max

lead acid batteries using cables supplied.

See instructions for required capacity.

Float charging voltage: 13.7VDC. Battery

normally need not be replaced for

at least 3 yrs.

J4 KEYPAD PORT #2

See instr. regarding port #2 use

1. GROUND (to keypad black wire)

4. DATA IN 2 (to keypad green wire)

5. AUX PWR #2 (to keypad red wire)

Rating: 10 - 14 VDC,

400mA max. See note 1

7. DATA OUT 2 (to keypad yellow wire)

(BLUE)

INTERFACE TO 5140DLM

MAIN TLM ON HOOK

VOLTAGE THRESHOLD

INTACT:25V

CUT: 13V

BACK-UP DIALER EARTH

GROUND SCREW

(wire to main PCB

terminal #30)

J2 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS

See instructions for trigger use and programming

(default functions shown)

1. OUT 4 (SILENT PANIC/DURESS)

2. OUT 7 (TROUBLE)

3. OUT 3 (BURGLARY/AUDIBLE PANIC)

4. OUT 6 (SUPERVISORY)

5. OUT 2 (FIRE)

6. OUT 5 (REMOTE KEYPAD SOUNDER)

7. OUT 1 (OPEN/CLOSE)

8. GROUND

9. IN 1 (N.O. LOOP)

RATINGS: OUT 1, 5, 7:

LOW: 2K TO GROUND

HIGH: 10 - 14VDC, 20mA MAX

OTHER OUTS: LOW: 1K TO GROUND

HIGH: 10 - 14VDC THRU 5K

Attach 5140DLM module to main PCB shield using

4 standoffs (supplied)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

BATTERY TABS

PINS 2, 3, 6, 8 & 9 NOT USED

RJ31X

MAIN

PHONE JACK

BELL OUTPUTS AUX. RELAY KEYPAD PORT #1

INPUT

OUTPUT

NOTE 2:

2k EOLR is Ademco model 610-7

CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM

SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD-

QUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION

SHALL BE PERMITTED ONLY WITH

THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL

AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.

THE BURGLARY ALARM SIGNAL

SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A

POLICE EMERGENCY NUMBER.

POLLING

LOOP

WARNING:

TO PREVENT

RISK OF

ELECTRICAL

SHOCK,

DISCONNECT

TELCO JACK

BEFORE

SERVICING

THIS PANEL

Connect

RJ31X using

cable supplied.

Supervision is

programmable

TYPES OF FIRE SIGNALLING SERVICE:

Manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm, sprinkler supervisory and waterflow alarm. UL Listed local control (non-coded).

UL Listed central station and remote station protected premises unit when used with 5140DLM back-up dialer module.

Installation limits under jurisdiction of local authority.

CIRCUIT

(ZONE) CONTROL UNIT

DELAY-SEC SMOKE DETECTOR

MODEL DELAY-SEC

THE DELAY TIME MARKED ON THE INSTALLED

DETECTOR(S) IS TO BE USED

Polling Loop

Ratings:

(supervised)

128mA max. See note 1.

See instructions for

compatible devices

and for max wire

run length

OUTPUT: 18VAC

72VA

BLACKWH

RJ31X

(connect using supplied cable)

Supervision is programmable

EARTH GROUND

• Ratings for zones 1,2:

- 10 - 14VDC

- 2mA max for smoke det. (up to 16 detectors

of the type specified in the instructions

can be used)

• UL compatibility ID: A

Do not mix fire and burg. sensors on one loop.

N.C. contacts for burg. usage only.

NOTES

TRNSFMR

ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED EXCEPT

THE OUTPUT OF THE 1451 TRANSFORMER

TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY

The 5140DLM Dialer

Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68

FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68628-MO-N

Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

WARNING:

THIS UNIT MAY BE PROGRAMMED TO

INCLUDE AN ALARM VERIFICATION

FEATURE THAT WILL RESULT IN A DELAY

OF THE SYSTEM ALARM SIGNAL FROM

THE INDICATED FIRE CIRCUITS. THE

TOTAL DELAY (CONTROL UNIT PLUS

SMOKE DETECTORS) SHALL NOT EXCEED

60 SECONDS. NO OTHER INITIATING

DEVICES SHALL BE CONNECTED TO

THESE CIRCUITS UNLESS APPROVED BY

THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING

JURISDICTION.

This equipment should be

installed in accordance

with the National Fire

Protection Association's

Standard 72 (National

Fire Protection Assoc.,

Batterymarch Park,

Quincy, MA. 02269). Printed

information describing proper

installation, operation,

testing, maintenance and

repair service is to be

provided with this equipment.

For commercial fire, bell timeout

must be a minimum of 6 minutes.

V250FBP-SOC-V0

VISTA-250FBP

SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS

4192SD

SMOKE

4209U

28 29

4208U

The VISTA-250 Main Dialer

Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68

FCC Reg. No.: AC3-USA-68192-AL-E

Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

VISTA-250FBP Summary of Connections Diagram

¬.l

K0376 8/02

165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791

K0376 Vista 128fbp V1 Installation Manual

Vista-128FBP v1 Installation Manual Vista-128FBP v1 Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation